Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3500 III Series Service Manual

Table of Contents

Quick Links

Download this manual

Revision 2.1

imageRUNNER ADVANCE

C3500 III Series

Servie Manual

Table of Contents

Troubleshooting

Summary of Contents for Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3500 III Series

Page 1 Revision 2.1 imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3500 III Series Servie Manual...
Page 2 When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.
Page 3 Important Notices Symbols Explanation Symbols Explanation Check a sound. Push the part. Disconnect the connector. Connect the power cable. Connect the connector. Disconnect the power cable. Remove the cable/wire from the Turn on the power. cable guide or wire saddle. Install the cable/wire to the cable Turn off the power.
Page 4: Table Of Contents
Contents Contents Safety Precautions....................1 Laser..............................2 Laser Safety............................2 Handling of Laser System........................2 Power Supply / Lithium Battery......................3 Turn power switch ON........................... 3 Power Supply............................3 Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery....................3 Toner Safety............................4 About Toner............................4 Handling Adhered Toner........................4 Notes on works............................4 Notes Before it Works Serving ......................
Page 5 Contents Shutdown Sequence........................... 48 Laser Exposure System........................49 Overview............................49 Specifications............................. 50 Laser ON/OFF control......................... 50 Horizontal scanning synchronous control....................50 Vertical Scanning Synchronization Control....................51 Image Mask Control..........................52 Scanner Motor Control.........................52 APC(Auto Power Control) control......................53 BD Correction Control......................... 54 Image Formation System........................
Page 6 Contents DADF-AV1 ............................134 Inner Finisher-K1......................... 135 Booklet/Staple Finisher-AA1.......................135 Cleaning Parts..........................136 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning............... 138 Preface............................139 Outline..............................139 Points to Note when Tightening a Screw..................... 139 Parts Replacement Procedures List....................140 Parts List............................142 External Cover..........................142 Motor..............................146 Fan..............................147 Clutch/Solenoid..........................148 Heater..............................
Page 7 Contents Removing the ITB Unit........................209 Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade...................... 212 Removing the ITB..........................213 Removing the Primary Transfer Roller (Y/M/C/BK)................217 Removing the Patch Sensor Unit......................218 Removing the Waste Toner Drive Unit....................220 Removing the Registration Drive Unit / Duplex Merging Motor / Registration Motor........220 Removing the Main Drive Unit......................
Page 8 Contents Copyboard Glass..........................283 6. Troubleshooting...................284 Initial Check.............................285 Initial check items list.........................285 Test Print............................286 Overview............................286 Steps to select the test print TYPE..................... 286 How to use the test print........................287 Troubleshooting Items........................291 List of Troubleshooting Items......................291 Debug Log............................304 Function Overview..........................304 Saving and Collecting Debug Logs.....................
Page 9 Contents E014-0002-05: Fixing Motor error....................... 338 E014-0003-05: Fixing Motor error....................... 338 E020-01A8-05: Toner Density Sensor (Y) output error................. 339 E020-01B8-05: Toner Density Sensor (Y) output error................. 340 E020-01C8-05: Error in take-up of Sealing Member (Y)............... 341 E020-02A8-05: Toner Density Sensor (M) output error.................342 E020-02B8-05: Toner Density Sensor (M) output error.................343 E020-02C8-05: Error in take-up of Sealing Member (M)...............344 E020-03A8-05: Toner Density Sensor (C) output error.................
Page 10 Contents E196-0000-05: Communication error....................368 E196-0001-05: Communication error....................368 E196-000F-05: Communication error....................369 E196-0100-05: Communication error....................369 E196-0101-05: Communication error....................369 E196-010F-05: Communication error....................369 E196-0800-05: Communication error....................370 E196-0801-05: Communication error....................370 E196-080F-05: Communication error....................370 E197-0B11-05: Serial communication error..................371 E197-0B20-05: Serial communication error..................
Page 11 Contents E248-0102-04: EEPROM error......................379 E248-0103-04: EEPROM error......................380 E260-0001-05: Power supply error..................... 380 E260-0002-05: Power supply error..................... 380 E280-0001-04: Communication error....................380 E280-0002-04: Communication error....................381 E280-0101-04: Communication error....................381 E280-0102-04: Communication error....................381 E302-0001-04: Error in paper front white shading................381 E302-0002-04: Error in paper front black shading................
Page 12 Contents E503-0022-02: Error in communication between the Finisher and Saddle Unit (Finisher-AA1)....389 E503-0031-02: Error in communication between the Finisher and Puncher Unit (Finisher-AA1)....389 E503-0032-02: Error in communication between the Finisher and Puncher Unit (Finisher-AA1)....390 E503-0041-02: Error in communication between the Finisher and Buffer Pass (Finisher-AA1)....390 E503-0042-02: Error in communication between the Finisher and Buffer Pass (Finisher-AA1)....
Page 13 Contents E577-8002-02: Error in the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (Finisher-AA1)..........405 E578-8001-02: Error in the Return Roller Lift Motor (Finisher-AA1)............405 E578-8002-02: Error in the Return Roller Lift Motor (Finisher-AA1)............405 E57B-8001-02: Error in the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (Finisher-AA1)......... 406 E57B-8002-02: Error in the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (Finisher-AA1).........
Page 14 Contents E602-1301-00: HDD error........................427 E602-1311-00: HDD error........................427 E602-1371-00: System verification error..................... 427 E602-1401-00: HDD error........................428 E602-1411-00: HDD error........................428 E602-1701-00: HDD error........................429 E602-1711-00: HDD error........................429 E602-1801-00: HDD error........................430 E602-1811-00: HDD error........................430 E602-1901-00: HDD error........................431 E602-1911-00: HDD error........................
Page 15 Contents E614-4012-00: Flash PCB error......................444 E614-9000-00: Flash PCB error......................444 E614-9001-00: Flash PCB error......................444 E614-9002-00: Flash PCB error......................444 E614-9003-00: Flash PCB error......................445 E614-9004-00: Flash PCB error......................445 E614-9005-00: Flash PCB error......................445 E614-FF01-00: Flash PCB error......................445 E614-FF11-00: Flash PCB error......................
Page 16 Contents E744-0001-00: Language file error..................... 454 E744-0003-00: Language file error..................... 455 E744-0004-00: Language file error..................... 455 E744-2000-00: Controller firmware mismatch..................455 E744-4000-05: Error due to the DC Controller PCB not compatible with the model........ 455 E744-5000-07: Mismatch of software version for fax................455 E746-0021-00: Image Analysis Board error..................455 E746-0022-00: Image Analysis Board error..................455 E746-0023-00: Image Analysis Board error..................455...
Page 17 Contents E996-0CA2-05: Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer)............. 463 E996-0CA3-05: Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer)............. 464 E996-0CA4-05: Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer)............. 464 E996-0CA5-05: Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer)............. 464 E996-0CA6-05: Error for collecting log (Printer)................... 464 E996-0CA7-05: Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer).............
Page 18 Contents COUNTER (Counter mode)....................... 893 FEEDER (ADF service mode)......................928 DISPLAY (State display mode)......................928 ADJUST (Adjustment mode)......................928 FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)..................930 OPTION (Specification setting mode)....................933 SORTER (Service mode for delivery options).................934 ADJUST (Adjustment mode)......................934 FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode)..................946 OPTION (Specification setting mode)....................
Page 19 Contents Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation................1031 Points to Note when turning ON/OFF the main power................ 1031 Installation Outline Drawing......................1031 Checking the Contents........................1031 Installation procedure........................1032 Checking after Installation ....................... 1034 Copy Tray-J2..........................1035 Points to Note at Installation......................1035 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation................
Page 20 Contents Checking the Contents........................1071 Installation Procedure........................1071 Checking the Settings........................1076 Operation Check..........................1076 Serial Intreface KIT-K3/ Copy Control Interface KIT-A1..............1077 Points to Note at Installation......................1077 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation................1077 Points to Note when turning ON/OFF the main power................ 1077 Installation Outline Drawing......................1077 Checking the Contents........................1078 Installation Procedure........................
Page 21 Contents Select Paper Settings........................1111 Connection Kit-A1 for Bluetooth LE....................1113 Points to Note at Installation ......................1113 Checking the Contents........................1113 Essential Items to Be Performed Before Installation................1113 Points to Note when turning ON/OFF the main power................ 1113 Installation Outline Drawing......................1113 Installation Procedure........................
Page 22 Contents APPENDICES....................1181 Service Tools..........................1182 List of Special Tools.........................1182 Solvents and Oils..........................1182 General Circuit Diagram........................1183 Host machine..........................1183 ADF..............................1195 Control Panel..........................1197 Reader............................1199 Software Counter Specifications....................1201 Removal............................1207 Overview............................1207 Work Procedure..........................1207 Target PCBs of Automatic Update....................1210 List of Service Modes That Can Be Restored................
Page 23: Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions Laser............. 2 Power Supply / Lithium Battery..... 3 Toner Safety..........4 Notes on works........4...
Page 24: Laser
Safety Precautions Laser Laser Safety Since radiation emitted inside this machine is completely confined with protective housings, external covers and interlock switches, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of normal use by users. Therefore, this machine is classified as a Class 1 laser product under the international standard IEC60825-1 that is regarded as safe during normal use.
Page 25: Power Supply / Lithium Battery
Safety Precautions Power Supply / Lithium Battery Turn power switch ON The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control energy saver key. The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power mode, sleep mode). CAUTION: Do not turn off the main power switch while the progress bar is indicated, during which access is made to the HDD.
Page 26: Toner Safety
Safety Precautions Toner Safety About Toner Toner is a nontoxic matter composed of plastic, iron and a trace of pigments. CAUTION: Never throw toner in flames to avoid explosion. Handling Adhered Toner • Use dry tissue paper to wipe off toner adhered to skin or clothes and wash in water. •...
Page 27: Notes On Assembly/Disassembly
Safety Precautions Notes on Assembly/Disassembly Follow the items below to assemble/disassemble the device. 1. Disconnect the power plug to avoid any potential dangers during assembling/disassembling works. 2. If not specially instructed, reverse the order of disassembly to reinstall. 3. Ensure to use the right screw type (length, diameter, etc.) at the right position when assembling. 4.
Page 28: Product Overview
Product Overview Product Lineup........7 Specifications........11 Parts Name......... 34...
Page 29: Product Lineup
1. Product Overview Product Lineup Host machine Product name The underlined numerical value indicates the print speed (ppm: page per minute). "i" indicates --. C3530F III C3520F III Print speed (BW/Color) 30/30 ppm 20/20 ppm Reader Equipped as standard Equipped as standard Copyboard Finished Stamp Equipped as standard...
Page 30 1. Product Overview Option ■ Image Reading System Options [17] [10] [11] [16] [12] [13] [20] [14] [19] [18] [15] Product name DADF - AV1 Single Pass DADF-B1 Platen Cover Type W Stamp Ink Cartridge-C1 Stamp Unit-B1 ADF Access Handle-A1 Cassette Feeding Unit-AP1 FL Cassette-BE1 FL Cassette-BF1...
Page 31 1. Product Overview Product name [20] Cassette Heater Unit-41 [21] Main Body Heater Unit-A1 ■ Function Expansion System Options [14] [13] [15] [11] [12] [10] [16] Product name NFC Kit-C1 Utility Tray-B1 Copy Card Reader Attachment-B5 Power Supply Cable-W1 Super G3 FAX Board-AU1 Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AU1 Voice Guidance Kit-G1 Voice Operation Kit-D1...
Page 32 1. Product Overview Product name [16] LIPSV PRT KIT-BF1 PS Printer Kit-BF1 PCL PRT KIT-AS1 Barcode Printing Kit-D1E SEARCHABLE PDF-F1 Reader Extensions-F1 SCAN ENHANCE-F1 Canon DGTL SIGNATURE-A1 iR-ADV Security Kit-T1 for IEEE 2600 Common Criteria Certification...
Page 33: Specifications
1. Product Overview Specifications Product Specification Item Specification/Function Machine installation method Desktop Photosensitive medium 30mm OPC Exposure method 1 beam Laser Charging method DC Roller Charging Developing method Dry, 2-component development Transfer method Intermidiate Transfer Belt Separation method Curvature separation + Static Eliminator Pickup method Simple retard roller method Fixing method...
Page 34: Fax Specifications
Up to 320 jobs Transmission Times Approximately 2.6 seconds (When sending LTR Canon original paper, Normal 8 pels x 3.85 line/mm ECM (JBIG)) *1 When using an IP telephone service, facsimile communication may not be performed normally via an IP telephone line. It is recommended to use facsimile communication via a general telephone (Public Switched Telephone Network) line.
Page 35: Productivity
1. Product Overview Productivity ■ iAC3530 III 2/3-way unit model Unit : images / min Media Size 1-side 2-side Cassette MP-Tray Cassette MP-Tray output output output output output output output output output output tray1/2 tray3 tray1/2 tray3 tray1 tray2 tray3 tray1 tray2 tray3...
Page 36 1. Product Overview Media Size 1-side 2-side Cassette MP-Tray Cassette MP-Tray output output output output output output output output output output tray1/2 tray3 tray1/2 tray3 tray1 tray2 tray3 tray1 tray2 tray3 Heavy 6(221 - 256 B4/LGL/K8 5 - 2 Heavy 7(257 - 300 Label A4/LTR A4R/LTRR...
Page 37 1. Product Overview Media Size 1-side 2-side Cassette MP-Tray Cassette MP-Tray output output output output output output output output tray1/2 tray3 tray1/2 tray3 tray1 tray2/3 tray1 tray2/3 Plain A5/A6R 30 - 4 23 - 4 Recycled STMT 23 - 4 Thin 1 A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 20 - 4...
Page 38 1. Product Overview Media Size 1-side 2-side Cassette MP-Tray Cassette MP-Tray output output output output output output output output tray1/2 tray3 tray1/2 tray3 tray1 tray2/3 tray1 tray2/3 Envelope Yougatanaga 3 15 - 2 11 - 2 (Long Edge Feed) Yougatanaga 3 10 - 2 7 - 2 (Short Edge Feed)
Page 39 1. Product Overview Media Size 1-side 2-side Cassette MP-Tray Cassette MP-Tray output output output output output output output output output output tray1/2 tray3 tray1/2 tray3 tray1 tray2 tray3 tray1 tray2 tray3 Heavy 1(106 - 128 B4/LGL/K8 7 - 2 3 - 2 5 - 2 3 - 2 7 - 2...
Page 40 1. Product Overview Media Size 1-side 2-side Cassette MP-Tray Cassette MP-Tray output output output output output output output output output output tray1/2 tray3 tray1/2 tray3 tray1 tray2 tray3 tray1 tray2 tray3 Envelope No.10(COM10) 10 - 2 7 - 2 (Short Edge Feed) ISO-C5 (Long 12 - 2...
Page 41 1. Product Overview Media Size 1-side 2-side Cassette MP-Tray Cassette MP-Tray output output output output output output output output tray1/2 tray3 tray1/2 tray3 tray1 tray2/3 tray1 tray2/3 Heavy 4(164 - 180 A5/A6R 12 - 2 11 - 2 STMT 11 - 2 Heavy 5(181 - 220 A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 10 - 2...
Page 42 1. Product Overview ■ iAC3520 III 2/3-way unit model Unit : images / min Media Size 1-side 2-side Cassette MP-Tray Cassette MP-Tray output output output output output output output output output output tray1/2 tray3 tray1/2 tray3 tray1 tray2 tray3 tray1 tray2 tray3 Plain...
Page 43 1. Product Overview Media Size 1-side 2-side Cassette MP-Tray Cassette MP-Tray output output output output output output output output output output tray1/2 tray3 tray1/2 tray3 tray1 tray2 tray3 tray1 tray2 tray3 Label A4/LTR A4R/LTRR 7 - 2 5 - 2 Transparency A4/LTR Post Card...
Page 44 1. Product Overview Media Size 1-side 2-side Cassette MP-Tray Cassette MP-Tray output output output output output output output output tray1/2 tray3 tray1/2 tray3 tray1 tray2/3 tray1 tray2/3 Plain STMT 20 - 4 Recycled A4R/LTRR/B5R/ 20 - 4 15 - 4 10 - 4 10 - 4 Thin 1...
Page 45: Pickup Specifications
1. Product Overview Media Size 1-side 2-side Cassette MP-Tray Cassette MP-Tray output output output output output output output output tray1/2 tray3 tray1/2 tray3 tray1 tray2/3 tray1 tray2/3 Envelope Yougatanaga 3 10 - 2 10 - 2 (Long Edge Feed) Yougatanaga 3 10 - 2 7 - 2 (Short Edge Feed)
Page 46 1. Product Overview Type (paper weight) Size Pickup position MP-Tray CST 1 CST 2 CST 3 CST 4 Thin 2 (52 - 59 g/m GLTR-R Thin 1 (60 - 63 g/m GLTR Plain 1 (64 - 75 g/m GLGL Plain 2 (76 - 90 g/m AFLS Plain 3 (91 - 105 g/m Color 1(64 - 82 g/m...
Page 47 1. Product Overview Type (paper weight) Size Pickup position MP-Tray CST 1 CST 2 CST 3 CST 4 Heavy 1 (106 - 128 g/m Heavy 2 (129 - 150 g/m K16R Heavy 3 (151 - 163 g/m Heavy 4(164 - 180 g/m I-LGL Heavy 5 (181 - 220 g/m Free...
Page 48 1. Product Overview Type (paper weight) Size Pickup position MP-Tray CST 1 CST 2 CST 3 CST 4 Custom size 0-2, 0-4, 2-1, Heavy 6(221 - 256 g/m 2-2, 2-3, 2-4, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, Custom size 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 5-1Custom size 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, 5-8, 5-9, 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-7,...
Page 49 1. Product Overview Type (paper weight) Size Pickup position MP-Tray CST 1 CST 2 CST 3 CST 4 1-Sided Coated 1(106 - 128 1-Sided Coated 2(129 - 163 1-Sided Coated 3(164 - 220 2-Sided Coated 1(106 - 128 2-Sided Coated 2(129 - 163 2-Sided Coated 3(164 - 220 11x17 LTRR...
Page 50 1. Product Overview Type (paper weight) Size Pickup position MP-Tray CST 1 CST 2 CST 3 CST 4 1-Sided Coated 4(221 - 256 LTRR 2-Sided Coated 4(221 - 256 STMTR STMT SRA3 12x18 EXEC OFFICIO E-OFFICIO B-OFFICIO M-OFFICIO A-OFFICIO A-LTR A-LTRR GLTR-R GLTR...
Page 51 1. Product Overview Type (paper weight) Size Pickup position MP-Tray CST 1 CST 2 CST 3 CST 4 1-Sided Coated 5(257 - 300 A-OFFICIO Yes *1 A-LTR Yes *1 2-Sided Coated 5(257 - 300 A-LTRR Yes *1 GLTR-R Yes *1 GLTR Yes *1 GLGL...
Page 52 1. Product Overview Type (paper weight) Size Pickup position MP-Tray CST 1 CST 2 CST 3 CST 4 Yes *2 Yes *2 Yes *2 Yes *2 Clear Film (121 - 220 g/m Yes *2 Yes *2 Yes *2 Yes *2 Yes *2 LTRR Yes *2...
Page 53 1. Product Overview Type (paper weight) Size Pickup position MP-Tray CST 1 CST 2 CST 3 CST 4 Label 1(118 - 185 g/m K16R Free Custom size 0-2, 0-4, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 2-4, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, 3-7, 3-8, 3-9, 5-1, 5-2, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, 5-8, 5-9, 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-7,...
Page 54: Paper Type
1. Product Overview Type (paper weight) Size Pickup position MP-Tray CST 1 CST 2 CST 3 CST 4 Free Pre-Punched 1(64 - 81 g/m Custom size 2-2, 2-3, 2-4, 3-1, 3-7, 5-1, 5-2, 5-7, 5-8, Custom size 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, 3-8, 3-9, 5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-6, 5-9, 6-2, 6-3, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-7...
Page 55 1. Product Overview Type Feeding direction (mm) Width direction (mm) Custom size 3-8 216 to 431.8 105 to 139.6 Custom size 3-9 431.9 to 457.2 105 to 139.6 Custom size 5-1 182 to 209.9 220.1 to 297 Custom size 5-2 210 to 215.9 220.1 to 279.3 Custom size 5-3...
Page 56: Parts Name
1. Product Overview Parts Name Cross Section View Toner Container Fixing Assembly ITB Unit Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Drum Unit Laser Scanner Unit Multi-purpose Tray Waste Toner Container Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Control Panel [1] [2] [3] [16] [15] [14]...
Page 57 1. Product Overview Name [Counter/Device Information] key Brightness Adjustment key Settings key [Clear] key [Stop] key [Start] key [10] Main Power indicator [11] Error indicator [12] Processing/Data indicator [13] [Reset] key [14] ID (Log In/Out) key [15] NFC (If equipped with NFC Kit-B1) [16] Touch panel display...
Page 58: Technology
Technology Basic Configuration......37 Original Exposure System....38 Main Controller........45 Laser Exposure System...... 49 Image Formation System....56 Fixing System........91 Pickup Feed System......102 External Auxiliary System....124...
Page 59: Basic Configuration
2. Technology Basic Configuration Functional Configuration This machine consists of 6 major blocks: Original Exposure and Feed System, Controller System, Laser Exposure System, Image Formation System, Fixing System, and Pickup Feed System. Original Exposure and Feed System Reader Delivery Fixing Fixing System Controller System...
Page 60: Original Exposure System
2. Technology Original Exposure System Overview ■ Reader Specifications Item Specification/Function Photo conductor Scanning of original At copyboard reading: Scanning by moving Scanner Unit Reading resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi Number of gradations 256 gradations Maximum document size At copyboard reading: 297 mm x 431.8 mm Magnification ratio 25% - 400%...
Page 61: Scanner Unit
2. Technology Key No. Name Symbol Function/Specification Sensor Lightproof Sheet Original Size Sensor (AB) UN_BO1 Overall reader control, digital image processing Original Size Sensor (Inch) PS_R1 Size detection in the vertical scanning direction (AB configuration) Scanner Motor PS_R2 Size detection in the vertical scanning direction (Inch configuration) Carriage Drive Belt STM1 2-phase Pulse Motor: Pulse control...
Page 62: Magnification Ratio
2. Technology The Reading Sensor has 4 lines (R, G, B, and B/W). At 600 dpi B&W reading, 1 line (B/W) is used. At color reading, 3 lines (R, G, and B) are used. Related error codes Light intensity error: •...
Page 63: Dust Detection Control
2. Technology ■ Control Description In horizontal scanning direction, sensor level of each original detection position is measured by moving the Scanner Unit to the detection position shown in the figure in relation to the original setting position. The size in the vertical scanning direction is determined by using the Original Size Sensor (AB) and Original Size Sensor (Inch).
Page 64: Image Processing
2. Technology Image correction control • At paper interval The Scanner Unit does not move. Reading is performed at the position determined by the control performed at job completion or at the start of a job, and image correction is performed if dust is detected at that position. 0.5 mm 0.5 mm C B A...
Page 65: Color Displacement Correction Processing In Vertical Scanning Direction
2. Technology Scanner Unit PCB (Reader) LED (4lines) Main Controller PCB ASIC Analog image signal EEP-ROM SRAM Gain Scanner unit Shading correction drive control correction data Analog image Color offset process Digital - gain correction correction conversion image - offset correction in sub scanning signal CCD/AP PCB...
Page 66 2. Technology The relations of the electrical components are shown below. Sensor Motor ADF Driver Scanner Unit Solenoid Main Controller PCB Related error codes Communication error between the Main Controller PCB and Scanner Unit • E280 - 0001: Communication between the Main Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was not completed within the specified period of time.
Page 67: Main Controller
2. Technology Main Controller Overview ■ Configuration/Function Main Controller PCB USB I/F TPM PCB Flash PCB Main Controller PCB Item Function Main Controller PCB System Control/Memory Control/Printer Output Image Processing Control, Reader Image Input Processing, Card Reader Connection I/F, Fax Image Processing, USB Extension HUB Connection I/F RAM (for temporarily storage of image data) For controller control + image processing USB port...
Page 68 2. Technology ■ Main Controller PCB J4503 J7178 J7018 J7071 J4514 J6010 J4502 J4501 J7203 J6004 J7600 J7628 J6001 J6003 J7229 J4504 J9500 J6005 J4515 J4511 J4506 J4508 J4510 J4513 J4512 J4509 J4505 ■ Motion Sensor Function Features of the Motion Sensor functions are shown below. •...
Page 69: Startup Sequence
2. Technology Startup Sequence Power Supply Switch ON Power Supply Switch ON Initializing process of hardware Starting system software [Flash PCB] Starting application [Hard disk] Standby screen display Standby screen display Screen sequence and internal processing sequence NOTE: To achieve faster startup, the progress bar and the active PCB are not synchronized. For this reason, the progress bar cannot be utilized for troubleshooting.
Page 70: Shutdown Sequence
2. Technology • E614-4001: Error in file system on the Flash PCB • E614-4002: Error in file system on the Flash PCB • E748-2010: Flash PCB error / HDD error NOTE: When the following errors occur, the system of the host machine has not been started normally. Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log.
Page 71: Laser Exposure System
2. Technology Laser Exposure System Overview The laser exposure system forms a static latent image on the Photosensitive Drum by laser exposure. The Laser Scanner Unit consists of the Laser Assembly and the Scanner Motor, and is controlled by the signal input from the DC Controller.
Page 72: Specifications
2. Technology Specifications Item Description Number of Laser Scanner Units Number of laser beams 1 beam per color Resolution 1200 dpi Number of Polygon Mirror facets 4 facets Laser ON/OFF control Purpose Turns the laser beam ON and OFF according to the combination of laser control signals. Execution timing After Power-On Control description...
Page 73: Vertical Scanning Synchronization Control
2. Technology Control description 1. The Y/M Laser Driver PCB forcibly emits the Bk laser diode of the C/Bk Laser Driver PCB by setting the Bk laser control signal to APC mode. 2. The laser beam of the Bk laser has a BD circuit in the scanning light path, and is incident on the BD Circuit. 3.
Page 74: Image Mask Control
2. Technology 3. The Laser Scanner Unit generates the laser drive signals based on the video signals. At this timing, the Laser Scanner Unit emits laser beams to match the leading edge of image with that of paper. NOTE: If the process speed is slowed by the print mode, the cycle of the TOP signal in continuous printing is lengthened according to the degree of slowing.
Page 75: Apc(Auto Power Control) Control
2. Technology 2. The Y/M Laser Driver PCB controls the Scanner Motor rotation speed to be constant by referring to the Scanner Motor rotation speed signal (FG signal). (From when the Scanner Motor starts rotation until it reaches the target revolutions and the machine starts image formation process) 3.
Page 76: Bd Correction Control
2. Technology 2. The APC mode is set for the Y/M and C/Bk Laser Driver PCB ICs, and the laser diode of each color is forcibly emitted. The photo diode (PD) monitors the laser diode (LD), and each Laser Driver IC adjusts the output of laser diode until the laser light intensity reaches a specified level.
Page 77 2. Technology Related error code • E100-0001: BD error • E110-0001: Scanner Motor error (FG lock error at startup) • E110-0002: Scanner Motor error (BD speed lock error at startup) • E110-0003: Scanner Motor error (BD phase lock error at startup)
Page 78: Image Formation System
2. Technology Image Formation System Overview ■ Specifications Item Function/Method Photosensitive Drum Material Drum diameter Φ30 Cleaning Cleaning Blade Process speed 1/1 speed: 119.4 mm/s 1/2 speed: 59.7 mm/s Drum Heater Developing Unit Developing method Dry, 2-component development Toner level detection Primary charging Charging method Roller charging...
Page 79: Print Process
2. Technology Name Laser Scanner Unit ■ Print Process Delivery Flow of print paper Rotating direction of ITB, Fixing block photosensitive drum 7.Fixing ITB cleaning block Transfer block 6.Separation 8.ITB cleaning 5.Secondary transfer 4.Primary 4.Primary 4.Primary 4.Primary transfer transfer transfer transfer 9.Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure 3.Development...
Page 80: Drum Unit / Developing Unit
2. Technology Drum Unit / Developing Unit ■ Parts / Drive Configuration CL01 CL02 CL03 CL04 Parts name Role Developing Cylinder The toner and carrier inside the Developer Container are coated on the surface, and the toner is developed on the Photosensitive Drum. Developer Feed Screw A Toner and carrier in the Developer Container are supplied to the Developing Cyl- inder.
Page 81: Drum Cleaning
2. Technology ■ Drum Cleaning/Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure Control Parts name Role Photosensitive Drum After a static latent image has been formed on the Photosensitive Drum, a toner image is formed with the toner from the Developing Cylinder. Cleaning Screw Residual toner that has been removed by the Cleaning Blade is fed. Cleaning blade Residual toner on the Photosensitive Drum is removed.
Page 82 2. Technology • 29-0301: Drum (C) pre-exposure alarm • 29-0401: Drum (K) pre-exposure alarm ■ Drum Unit Detection Whether the Drum Unit is installed or not is detected. Detection timing: • At power-on • When recovering from sleep (after 8 hours or more have elapsed) Detection description: The following is determined from the AC current monitor value when discharge current control is executed to detect the presence or absence of the Drum Unit.
Page 83 2. Technology 3. The Remaining Days is calculated based on the calculated LIFE value considering the usage conditions. DC Controller PCB (UN049) Life Information Drum Unit Memory PCB (UN35〜38) Drum Unit Memory Item Advance notice alarm Display of preparation Display that prompts re- Completion of replace- warning placement...
Page 84 2. Technology COPIER > OPTION > PM-EXC-M > PT-DRM Alarm code • Drum Unit (each color) advance notice alarm 40-0070 : Y 40-0071 : M 40-0072 : C 40-0073 : K • Drum Unit (each color) replacement completion alarm 43-0070 : Y 43-0071 : M 43-0072 : C 43-0073 : K...
Page 85: Transfer/Separation
2. Technology Developing bias control Purpose To apply voltage to the Developing Cylinder in order to generate a potential difference from the Photosensitive Drum Control description The developing bias (AC, DC negative), which has been generated on the Secondary Charging PCB (UN03), is applied to the Developing Cylinder.
Page 86 2. Technology Related error code E010: Bk Drum_ITB Motor error • E010-0001: BK Drum Motor startup error • E010-0002: BK Drum Motor speed error • E010-0003: BK Drum Motor lock detection ■ Primary Transfer Control Primary Transfer ATVC Purpose The transfer voltage required to obtain the target transfer current value is set in order to prevent transfer failure due to environmental changes.
Page 87 2. Technology ON and OFF of the primary transfer bias can be switched by color, and it is possible to turn OFF the bias of the color which will not be used. NOTE: The ATVC control secures transfer performance that is not affected by change in resistance caused by the environment as well as deterioration of the Primary Transfer Roller and is executed respectively to the primary transfer bias of each color.
Page 88 2. Technology Color Primary transfer disengagement initialization operation Initialization is performed so that the coupling is securely engaged at power-on and when the door is closed because the state of the primary transfer disengagement is not determined. Operation description The Primary Transfer Disengagement Cam [1] is rotated so that the mode shifts in the following order: Bk mode, Color mode, and Full disengagement mode.
Page 89: Itb Cleaning
2. Technology Mode Status Operation status Full disengage- ment mode *1: When image formation is executed *2: Disengagement is not performed during the operation for entering the deep sleep mode. ■ ITB Displacement Correction Purpose To prevent problems caused by ITB displacement. Control description With this machine, belt displacement is prevented by ITB displacement correction using a rib guide mechanism.
Page 90 2. Technology Parts name Role ITB Cleaning Screw Residual toner in the ITB Cleaning Unit is fed. ITB Cleaning Blade Residual toner on the ITB is collected. Waste Toner Ejection Mouth Ejection Mouth for toner collected on the ITB Bk Drum _ ITB Motor The ITB Cleaning Screw is driven.
Page 91 2. Technology Control timing Adjustment timing Condition At startup When turning ON the main 8 hours or more have elapsed in high-speed startup mode power At normal startup At recovery from sleep mode 8 hours or more have elapsed in sleep mode Automatic adjustment by replace- When replacing the Drum When a new Drum Unit is inserted...
Page 92: Toner Supply Area
2. Technology Toner Supply Area ■ Parts / Drive Configuration PS26,27,28,29 UN39,40,41,42 UN21,22,23,24 Parts name Role Toner Feed Screw A Toner is supplied to the Developing Unit. Toner Feed Screw B Toner is supplied to the Developing Unit. UN39 to 42 New/Old Bottle Detection Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk) The state of the Toner Container is detected.
Page 93: Detection Timing
2. Technology Detection timing • At power-on • When the Front Cover is closed • When recovering from sleep mode (not displayed after Use is pressed) The Bottle New/Old Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk) (UN39/UN40/UN41/UN42) detects the state from the memory [1] of the Toner Container. UN39,40,41,42 Screen Display A message shown below is displayed according to the condition detected from the memory.
Page 94 2. Technology ■ Toner Container Detection Purpose Presence/absence of the Toner Container is detected. Control description The Toner Supply Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk) (PS26/PS27/PS28/PS29) is arranged as shown in the figure below; when the Toner Container is inserted, the sensor reacts and the Toner Container is detected. <...
Page 95: Toner Supply Control
2. Technology Toner Supply Sensor Toner Log Connector PS26,27,28,29 UN39,40,41,42 Bottle Motor(YM) Bottle Motor(CK) Hopper Unit Developing Motor ATR Sensor UN21,22,23,24 UN049 DC Controller PCB UN05 Developing Assembly supply count Main Controller PCB Video Count Value ATR Sensor result Related error code •...
Page 96 2. Technology UN05 Toner Supply Sensor Main Controller PCB Bottle Motor (YM) PS26,27,28,29 Bottle Motor (CK) Video Count Value Flag [1] Shrunk UN049 Press DC Controller PCB Developing Assembly supply count ATR Sensor result Developing Motor Toner Feed Screw [2] UN21,22,23,24 Toner Density Sensor The following shows the image of the Drive Unit viewed from the back side.
Page 97 2. Technology 4. The driving force is transmitted only to the gears on the side toward which the gear moved, and the Toner Bottle rotates and toner is supplied. REAR VIEW 5. Toner supply starts after the Toner Supply Sensor (Y/M/C/Bk) (PS26/PS27/PS28/PS29) is turned ON. Driving the Bottle Motor (YM/CK) (M04/M05) rotates the Toner Bottle, causing the flag of the Toner Supply Sensor to drop to the...
Page 98 2. Technology cut-off part of the Toner Bottle as shown in the figure below, which in turn switches OFF the sensor. After that, when the flag of the Toner Supply Sensor moves out of the cut-off part, the sensor is turned ON. When the Toner Supply Sensor is OFF, 1 block's worth of toner is supplied to the Developing Unit.
Page 99: Toner Level Detection
2. Technology ■ Toner Level Detection Purpose To display the life/remaining days to notify the Toner Container replacement timing. The life and remaining days can be seen in the following menu or service mode. Consumption confirmation Control Panel : Status Monitor > Consumables / Others > Check Consumables Control Panel display example Remote UI : Status Monitor / Cancel >...
Page 100 2. Technology Status name Low remaining toner in container Toner Container Empty Message (Yellow, Cyan, Magenta, Black) Replace the toner cartridge (yellow, toner is low. (Replacement not cyan, magenta, black). yet needed.) *2 Host machine operation after Replacement not yet needed. Host machine is stopped.
Page 101: Control Panel Menu
2. Technology NOTE: The toner container premature replacement detection function does not work for unidentified Toner Containers. Control description Message displayed when the Toner Operation suspended when the Toner Toner replace- ment complete Container is removed Container is prematurely replaced Detection timing When the Toner Container is removed be- When the Toner Container is replaced be-...
Page 102: Waste Toner Feed Unit
2. Technology Alarm Codes • Toner Container replacement notice alarm • New Toner Container replacement detection 10-0100-0071 (Bk) 10-0100-0072 (Y) 10-0100-0073 (M) 10-0100-0074 (C) • Toner Container premature replacement detection 10-0100-0081 (Bk) 10-0100-0082 (Y) 10-0100-0083 (M) 10-0100-0084 (C) • Unidentified Toner Container replacement detection 10-0100-0181 (Bk) 10-0100-0182 (Y) 10-0100-0183 (M)
Page 103 2. Technology Parts name Role CL Drum Motor The Y/M/C Drum Unit Cleaning Screw is driven. Waste Toner Feed Motor The Waste Toner Screw is driven. To make the waste toner inside the Waste Toner Container uniformly even. UN30 Waste Toner Sensor PCB Waste Toner Container full level detection SW01 Waste Toner Container Detection...
Page 104 2. Technology COPIER > OPTION > PM-DLV-D > WST-TNR *2: Display / hide of the Waste Toner Container preparation warning message can be set in the following service mode. (0: Hide, 1: Display. The default value varies according to the location.) COPIER >...
Page 105: Image Stabilization Control
2. Technology Image Stabilization Control ■ Overview Purpose To control to prevent image failure due to change of the environment or deterioration of parts to ensure stabilized print image Control description Various controls are performed to form patch pattern [1] on the ITB and read the patch pattern using the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Front/Rear) (UN46/47).
Page 106 2. Technology Control tim- Conditions for execution Type of control Laser power D-half con- ARCDAT Color dis- Patch Sen- PASCAL correction trol control placement sor adjust- control control correction ment control At job comple- At last rotation performed ev- tion ery 50 accumulated images At last rotation performed ev- ery 500 accumulated images...
Page 107 2. Technology Control description 1. The Main Controller PCB outputs patch data in each color (Y, M, C, and Bk) to the DC Controller PCB. 2. The DC Controller PCB forms a patch pattern of each color (Y/M/C/Bk) on the ITB. 3.
Page 108 2. Technology 3. Based on the above-mentioned detection result, correction is performed according to the amount of color displacement. Long patch pattern Y M C Bk Y M C Bk 8 Set 2 Set Short patch pattern Y M C Bk Y M C Bk 2Set 1Set...
Page 109: Light Intensity Adjustment
2. Technology • 34-0034: The correction value (C) of the write start position in the vertical scanning direction exceeded the upper limit during fine adjustment of color displacement • 34-0036: The correction value (C) of the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction exceeded the upper limit during fine adjustment of color displacement •...
Page 110: Other Controls
2. Technology Related service mode • Display of the ITB rear side background light intensity (P-wave): COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-P-Y • Display of the ITB front side background light intensity (P-wave): COPIER > DISPLAY > DENS > P-B-P-C •...
Page 111 2. Technology ● Black Band Sequence Execution condition/timing hen the travel distance of the drum or the ITB has exceeded the designated value Control description In order to prevent the Cleaning Blades flip, toner is supplied to the Drum Cleaning Blade and the ITB Cleaning Blade. Transparency Black Band Sequence Execution condition/timing When a predetermined number of transparency films have been fed...
Page 112 2. Technology Warm-up rotation control Long Short None ARCDAT ■ Behavior when color printing is limited or there is no color toner Purpose To enable B&W printing and copying without stopping the entire printing function when an error attributed to the Y/M/C Developing Unit or when there is no Y/M/C toner.
Page 113: Fixing System
2. Technology Fixing System Overview In the fixing system, toner that has been transferred to the paper by process in the image formation system is fixed. This machine uses the on-demand fixing method for fixing. PS10 Name Fixing Pressure Roller Fixing Film Sensor Flag Fixing Heater...
Page 114: Major Components
2. Technology ■ Major Components UN31 PS10 TH01_01 TH01_02 TP01 TH01_03 Parts name Function/Method Fixing Pressure Roller A toner image on paper is fixed by applying heat and pressure. Fixing Film Unit Fixing heater For heating the center/edges of the Fixing Film (Ceramic Heater) TH01_02 Main Thermistor This is engaged with Heater.
Page 115: Overview Of Fixing Temperature Control
2. Technology Overview of Fixing Temperature Control Fixing temperature STBY INTR PRNT Startup Sheet-t During-print (warm-up o-sheet Flying start control rotation) control control temperature control temperature temperature temperature Time Command for Command for flying start print start ■ Standby Temperature Control This is a control to pre-heat the Fixing Assembly to reduce time to start printing.
Page 116: Print Temperature Control
2. Technology ■ Flying start temperature control Purpose To reduce time to print the first sheet (FCOT). Startup conditions • When pressing the Numeric Keypad on the Control Panel/Touch Panel • When the Main Power Switch is ON • When recovering from sleep mode to standby mode •...
Page 117 2. Technology *1: At down sequence • During auto 2-sided mode • During small-size mode • At execution of controls (ATR control, registration control, ATVC control) *2: Determined according to the time which elapsed from when fixing temperature control (including standby control) finished last time and the fixing temperature when startup control started.
Page 118: Down Sequence Control
2. Technology • Setting of the fixing control temperature (Heavy 6): COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TB26 • Setting of the fixing control temperature (Heavy 7): COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > TMP-TB27 • Setting of the fixing control temperature (Coated 4): COPIER >...
Page 119: Film Unit Engagement/Disengagement Control
2. Technology Non-feeding area Non-feeding area Startup conditions When the difference between the higher temperature detected by either the Sub Thermistor 1 (TH01_03) or the Sub Thermistor 2 (TH01_01) and the temperature of the Main Thermistor (TH01_02) is the specified temperature or higher at the time a sheet with a width wider than the preceding one is fed during printing.
Page 120: Fixing Slight Rotation Function
2. Technology Name Fixing Pressure Roller PS13 Fixing Pressure Release Sensor Execution condition/timing Engagement operation • At power-on (*) • At recovery from sleep mode (*) • At warm-up rotation • When the Fixing Pressure Roller is in a disengaged position at the start of a job * Cannot be executed when the 24V interlock is disconnected due to reasons such as door being open.
Page 121: Fixing Unit Detection
2. Technology To prevent these symptoms, one Arch Sensor (PS11) located at the inlet of the Fixing Unit detects the slack of paper and adjusts the rotation speed of the Fixing Motor. This keeps an appropriate level of paper slack. The Arch Sensor (PS11) detects the paper arch and changes the drive speed of the Fixing Motor as follows: 1.
Page 122: Detection Of Whether The Fixing Unit Is New
2. Technology Detection of Whether the Fixing Unit is New Purpose The machine detects whether the Fixing Unit is new in order to clear the parts counter. Control description With this machine, the Fixing Fuse PCB (UN31) detects whether the Fixing Unit is new. Installing a new Fixing Unit in the machine blows the fuse.
Page 123 2. Technology Error Codes Detail Code Description Clearing of error E009 Fixing Film Unit engagement/disengagement error 0000 Fixing engagement timeout error Not necessary 0001 Fixing disengagement timeout error Not necessary E808 Detection of a failure in zero cross circuit Not necessary 0001 Zero cross signal detection error Not necessary...
Page 124: Pickup Feed System
2. Technology Pickup Feed System Overview ■ Characteristics Support for envelopes Envelope can be fed from the cassette of the machine. Improved Multi-purpose Tray usability The usability has been improved by automatic paper size recognition for Multi-purpose Tray pickup. ■ Specifications Stack Bypass Item Description...
Page 125 2. Technology Cassette 2 Item Description Paper Feeding Retard separation method Method Paper Size A3, B4, A4R, A4, B5R, B5, A5R, A5, A6R, 11"×17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, EXE, K8, K16, K16R, STMT, 12"×18", postcard (postal card, replay postcard, 4-side), Envelope (Nagagata 3, Yougatanaga 3, Kakugata 2, Monarch, COM10 No. 10, DL) Custom sizes (139.7 ×...
Page 126 2. Technology Name Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Registration Roller [10] Duplex Merging Roller [11] Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller [12] Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller [13] Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller [14] Cassette 1 Feed Roller [15] Cassette 1 Separation Roller [16] Cassette 2 Vertical Path Roller [17] Cassette 2 Feed Roller...
Page 127 2. Technology Name PS52 Third Delivery Sensor PS53 Second Delivery Paper Full Sensor * PS51 and PS52 do not exist on models without 3-Way Unit. ● Diagram of load drives When the 3-Way Unit is connected SL06 Name Cassette 1,2 Pickup Motor Fixing Motor Duplex Reverse Motor Registration Motor...
Page 128 2. Technology Without 3-Way Unit SL06 Name SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid Cassette 1,2 Pickup Motor Fixing Motor Duplex Reverse Motor Registration Motor Cassette 1,2 Feed / Multi-purpose Pickup Motor Duplex Merging Motor...
Page 129: Paper Path
2. Technology ■ Paper Path When the 3 Way Unit-D1 is connected Acceleration section Reverse Mouth Third Delivery Second Delivery Reverse Mouth First Delivery Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Cassette 1 Pickup Cassette 2 Pickup...
Page 130: Cassette Pickup Assembly
2. Technology When the 3 Way Unit-D1 is not connected Acceleration section Reverse Mouth First Delivery Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Cassette 1 Pickup Cassette 2 Pickup Cassette Pickup Assembly ■ Parts Configuration PS04 PS08 PS05 PS17 SW13 PS06 PS07 PS24 PS19 SW16 SW15 Name Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller...
Page 131 2. Technology Name Cassette 1 Feed Roller Cassette 1 Separation Roller Cassette 1 Pickup Roller Cassette 2 Separation Roller Cassette 2 Feed Roller Cassette 2 Pickup Roller Cassette 2 Vertical Path Roller Cassette 1,2 Lifter Motor Cassette 1,2 Pickup Motor Cassette 1,2 Feed/Multi-purpose Pickup Motor SW13 Cassette 1 Size Switch...
Page 132 2. Technology When the paper surface reaches the position of the Pickup Roller, the Cassette1/2 Lifter Sensors (PS04/PS06) are turned ON to detect that the paper has reached the pickup position. Lifter Error Detection At first and second failure of paper surface detection, Trailing Edge Guide Plate error is displayed on the Control Panel to prompt the user to open and then close the cassette.
Page 133 2. Technology List of Paper Size by Location Location Default setting Inch size A/K Size Locations other than above A/B size *2 : Preferences > Paper Settings > A5R/STMTR Paper Selection *3 : Configure the setting that supports EXEC/16K (Cassette 1 to 4) in the following service mode (Lv. 2). Cassette 1: COPIER >...
Page 134 2. Technology Name SW13 Cassette 1 Size Switch Cassette 2 The paper size in the cassette is automatically detected by the Cassette 2 Size Switch A/B after the position of the Guide Plate is adjusted. The switch consists of 3 microswitches, and length and width are detected in accordance with the combination of ON/OFF.
Page 135 2. Technology • Setting that supports EXEC/16K (Cassette 2) : COPIER > OPTION > CST > C2-K-SW • Setting that supports EXEC/16K (Cassette 3) : COPIER > OPTION > CST > C3-K-SW • Setting that supports EXEC/16K (Cassette 4) : COPIER >...
Page 136 2. Technology PS05 PS04 PS05 PS05 PS17 PS05 Name Paper PS04 Cassette 1 Lifter Sensor PS05 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor PS17 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A...
Page 137 2. Technology Cassette 1 PS06 PS07 PS19 Name Lifter Gear Paper Detection Lever Lifting Plate PS04 Cassette 1 Lifter Sensor PS05 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor PS17 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A Cassette 2 PS06 PS07 PS19 Name Lifter Gear Paper Detection Lever Lifting Plate PS06...
Page 138: Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup Assembly
2. Technology Name PS07 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor PS19 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Assembly ■ Parts / Drive Configuration PS30 PS31 UN29 PS32 PS03 Name Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller PS03 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor PS30...
Page 139 2. Technology Related alarm codes • 04-0007: MP Tray Lifter error • 04-0017: Multi-purpose tray paper feed retry error ■ Multi-purpose Tray paper detection Presence/absence of paper on the Multi-purpose Tray is detected by the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor (PS03). ■...
Page 140: Fixing/Registration Assembly
2. Technology Fixing/Registration Assembly ■ Parts / Drive Configuration PS22 Name Registration Roller Duplex Merging Roller Pre-Registration Sensor Flag PS22 Pre-Registration Sensor Registration Motor Duplex Merging Motor ■ Registration Control Purpose This control corrects paper skew and aligns the leading edge of the paper with that of the image. Skew Correction Control The paper leading edge runs into the stopped Registration Roller, thereby generating an arch in order to correct the skew.
Page 141 2. Technology PS22 PS22 Name Paper Registration Roller Slack Duplex Merging Roller PS22 Pre-Registration Sensor Registration Motor Duplex Merging Motor The feed control to align the leading edge of paper with the leading edge of image uses the Pre-Registration Sensor as the reference for detecting the leading edge, and "non-stop registration control"...
Page 142: Reverse / Delivery Assembly
2. Technology Reverse / Delivery Assembly ■ Parts / Drive Configuration When the 3 Way Unit-D1 is connected SL06 Name Name Second Delivery/Reverse Roller Fixing Motor Reverse Vertical Path Roller 1 Duplex Reverse Motor Reverse Vertical Path Roller 2 Reverse Motor First Delivery Roller Second Delivery Motor Third Delivery Roller...
Page 143 2. Technology ■ The Number of Circulating Sheets, Feed Path and Reverse/Standby Control at 1-sided/2-sided Feeding With this machine, the number of circulating sheets, feed route, reverse position and standby position (1- and 2-sided) differ according to the set length of fixed size paper and delivery outlet. Standby timing at standby position (1- and 2-sided) •...
Page 144: Jam Detection
2. Technology When the 3 Way Unit-D1 is installed Standard size Paper length Delivery Number of Feed path Reverse po- Standby position circulating sition sheets STMT, A5 92 to 181.9 mm First deliv- Duplex not supported Second de- livery Third deliv- B5 to LTR or smaller 182 to 216 mm First deliv-...
Page 145 2. Technology Code No.* Symbol Sensor name Jam type (XX)* IO > DCON 1 = Paper present xx07 PS14 First Delivery Sensor P006L > bit1 > 1: Paper present xx08 PS51 Second Delivery/Reverse P008H > bit2 > 1: Paper Sensor present xx09 PS52...
Page 146: External Auxiliary System
2. Technology External Auxiliary System Software Counter Control This machine has software counters which count the number of prints/copies according to the job type. Various counters are displayed by pressing the Check Counter key on the Control Panel. The default counters for each country (model) are listed below.
Page 147 2. Technology Target Number displayed for each counter (in service mode)/Item Target country Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Counter 7 Counter 8 code GER model Total Total Total (Full Total (Full Scan (Total Print (Total Type 1 (Black/...
Page 148: Fan Control
2. Technology Loca- Location Loca- Location Loca- Location tion tion tion code code code China Greece Taiwan Estonia ■ Count-up Timing Count-up timing differs according to the following: • Print mode (1-sided print/2nd side of 2-sided print, 1st side of 2-sided print) •...
Page 149: Heater Control
2. Technology ■ Speed Control Of the fans installed in this machine, the Front Fan (FM01), the Motor Fan (FM03), the Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM02) and the Controller Fan (FM04) are subject to speed control. Each controller switches voltages to switch the fan rotation speed. Fan Drive Sequence Controlled by DCON...
Page 150 2. Technology Reader Control panel State of power supply ON Standby Energy Saving State of power supply OFF Engine Main Controler [Energy Saver] key is turned off [Energy Saver] key is turned on A specified period of time has passed Sleep Mode Sleep Standby Energy Use...
Page 151: Quick Startup
2. Technology Function Settings > Receive/Forward • Fax Settings >Select RX Mode > Fax/Tel (Auto Switch) (*1) • Fax Settings > Remote RX > ON (*1) • Fax Settings > Set Number Display > ON (*1) Function Settings > Send •...
Page 152 2. Technology NOTE: The quick startup function can be set from "Settings/Registration". • Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Quick Startup Settings for Main Power [On]: Quick startup is executed (default) [Off]: Quick startup is not executed Disconnect the power plug when performing work with the possibility to come in contact with the PCBs above. If a conductive material comes in contact with the PCB, short circuit may occur in the PCB, and may cause damage on it.
Page 153: Periodical Service
Periodical Service Consumable Parts List...... 132 Cleaning Parts........136...
Page 154: Consumable Parts List
3. Periodical Service Consumable Parts List Host machine [11] [10] [12] Name Parts num- Quan- Estimated Work de- Service Alarm Code Remarks ber *1 tity life *2 scription Mode *3 Parts Replace- counter ment com- ( COUN- pletion TER > DRBL-1/2 ) ITB Unit FM1-A605...
Page 155: Single Pass Dadf-B1
3. Periodical Service Name Parts num- Quan- Estimated Work de- Service Alarm Code Remarks ber *1 tity life *2 scription Mode *3 Parts Replace- counter ment com- ( COUN- pletion TER > DRBL-1/2 ) Drum Unit ( C ) Replacement PT-DR-C 43-0072 Alarm log...
Page 156: Cassette Feeding Unit-Ap1
3. Periodical Service Cassette Feeding Unit-AP1 There is no comsumable parts. DADF-AV1 Name Parts number Quantity Estimated Work de- Service Mode Alarm Code life scription Parts counter Replacement ( COUNTER > completion DRBL-1/2 ) Pickup Roller Unit FM1-D470 80,000 pages Replacement DF-PU-RL 43-0091 Separation Roller...
Page 157: Inner Finisher-K1
3. Periodical Service *2: All the values described in this column are estimated replacement timing in A4 size. The replacement timing is a reference value in the case of usage in general offices, and the actual value differs depending on the customer environment, operation conditions in the field, etc.
Page 158: Cleaning Parts
3. Periodical Service Cleaning Parts [16] [15] [17] [12] [11] [10] [13] [14] [1] [2] [15] [16]...
Page 159 3. Periodical Service Name Cleaning Method Timing Patch Sensor Clean with a blower. As needed Clean with a tightly-wrung cotton swab when soiling or When ITB Unit re- foreign matter cannot be removed. placement Pre-transfer Cover Sheet When there is soiling or foreign matter, clean with lint-free As needed paper moistened with alcohol.
Page 160: Parts Replacement And Cleaning
Parts Replacement and Cleaning Preface..........139 Parts Replacement Procedures List. 140 Parts List........... 142 External Cover/Interior System..154 Original Exposure System....176 Controller System......185 Laser Exposure System....198 Image Formation System....201 Fixing System........242 Pickup Feed System......249...
Page 161: Preface
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Preface Outline This chapter describes disassembly and reassembly procedures of the printer. The service technician is to identify the cause of printer failures according to follow the disassembly procedures of each part to replace the defective parts or the consumable parts. Note the following precautions when working on the printer.
Page 162: Parts Replacement Procedures List
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Parts Replacement Procedures List Category Description Parts List “Parts List” on page 142 “External Cover” on page 142 “External Cover/Interior System” on page 154 “Original Exposure System” on page 38 “Controller System” on page 185 “Laser Exposure System”...
Page 163 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Category Description Fixing System “Fixing System” on page 91 “Removing the Fixing Film Unit” on page 242 “Removing the Fixing Pressure Roller / Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft Support” on page 246 “Removing the Fixing Drive Unit” on page 248 Pickup / Feed System “Pickup Feed System”...
Page 164: Parts List
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Parts List External Cover ■ Host Machine (Front View, Left Side) [10] [11] [12] [23] [13] [22] [14] [18] [15] [21] [16] [20] [17] [19] [18] Parts Name Parts Name Reader Left Cover Reader Left Retaining Cover Reader Hinge Lower Cover Reader Cable Cover Reader Glass Support Cover...
Page 165 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Host Machine (Inside the machine) [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] Parts Name Parts Name Push-out Stopper Tray Guide First Delivery Tray Inner Connector Cover Second Delivery Tray Support Plate Inner Delivery Cover Inner Cover (Right Upper) Reverse Trailing Edge Guide Reverse Guide Cover...
Page 166 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Host Machine (Control Panel) Parts Name Parts Name Control Panel Upper Cover Control Panel Cover (Lower) Control Panel Cover (Rear)
Page 167 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Host Machine (Rear View, Right Side) [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [10] [16] [15] [14] [13] [10] [12] [11] Parts Name Parts Name HDD Cover Right Cover (Rear Upper) Blind Cover (Rear) Cover (Rear Upper) Right Cover Assembly (Rear Lower) Cover (Rear Lower) Power Supply Cord Cover...
Page 168: Motor
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Motor Parts Name Main Unit Laser Scanner Motor Laser Scanner Unit Bk Drum _ ITB Motor Main Drive Unit CL Drum Motor Main Drive Unit Bottle Motor (YM) Bottle Drive Unit (YM) Bottle Drive Unit (YM) Bottle Drive Unit (CBk) Cassette 1,2 Lifter Motor Lifter Drive Unit...
Page 169: Fan
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning FM05 FM01 FM03 FM02 Parts Name Main Unit FM01 Front Fan Front Fan Unit FM02 Power Supply Cooling Fan Power Supply Fan FM03 Motor Fan FM05 Controller Fan Main Controller PCB...
Page 170: Clutch/Solenoid
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Clutch/Solenoid SL06 SL02 CL04 CL03 CL02 CL01 Name Main Unit SL02 Registration Shutter Solenoid Registration Patch Sensor Unit SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid First Delivery Unit CL01 Developing Cylinder Clutch (Y) Main Drive Unit CL02 Developing Cylinder Clutch (M) Main Drive Unit CL03 Developing Cylinder Clutch (C)
Page 171: Heater
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Heater TH01_01 TH01_02 TP01 TH01_03 Parts Name Main Unit Fixing heater Fixing Unit Cassette Heater Cassette Heater Unit Inside Heater Inside Heater TH01_01 Main Thermistors 1 Fixing Unit TH01_02 Sub Thermistors 2 Fixing Unit TH01_03 Sub Thermistors 1 Fixing Unit TP01...
Page 172: Sensor
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Sensor PS53 PS51 PS52 PS14 PS12 PS13 PS11 PS33 PS10 UN26 UN27 PS08 PS04 PS18 PS05 PS17 UN25 PS20 PS22 PS06 PS19 PS07 PS24 Name Main Unit PS04 Cassette 1 Lifter Sensor Cassette 1 Pickup Unit PS05 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor Cassette 1 Pickup Unit...
Page 173: Switch
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Name Main Unit UN26 Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Rear) Registration Patch Sensor Unit Switch SW27 SW04 SW26 SW11 SW03 SW01 SW02 SW12 SW16 SW13 SW15 SW10 Parts Name Main Unit SW01 Waste toner container detection switch SW02 Interlock Switch 1 Front Fan Unit...
Page 174: Pcb
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning UN16 UN15 UN47 UN14 UN05 UN04 UN02 UN01 UN07 UN03 Name Main Unit UN01 Low Voltage Power Supply PCB Low Voltage Power Supply Unit UN02 Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN03 High Voltage Power Supply PCB UN04 DC Controller PCB UN05...
Page 175 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning UN18 UN10 UN31 UN29 UN67 UN09 UN08 Name Main Unit UN08 Y/M Laser Driver PCB Laser Scanner Unit UN09 C/Bk Laser Driver PCB Laser Scanner Unit UN10 3 Way Unit Driver PCB Second Delivery Unit UN29 Multi-purpose Tray Width Sensing PCB Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit...
Page 176: External Cover/Interior System
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning External Cover/Interior System Fully open the Right Door 1. Open the Right Door. 2. Lift up the Right Door [1], slide the Right Door Guide (Left) [2] and Right Door Guide (Right) [3] in the direction in the figure below to fully open it.
Page 177: Removing The Front Fan
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Front Door [1] while lifting it up slightly and pushing the claw [2]. • 1 Claw [2] • 2 Bosses [3] Removing the Front Fan ■ Preparation 1. Open the Front Door.“Removing the Front Door” on page 154 2.
Page 178 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Inner Right Cover [1]. • 1 Screw [2] 3. Pull out the cassette [1] and open the Right Cover (Front Upper) [2]. • 2 Screws [3] 4. Remove the connector [1] of the Front Fan.
Page 179: Removing The Power Supply Cooling Fan
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Open the Front Fan [1] and remove the connector [2]. • 2 Screws [3] • 1 Claws [4] 6. Remove the Front Fan. Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan ■ Procedure 1. Remove the screw [1] and disconnect the connector[2]. •...
Page 180: Removing The Primary Transfer High Voltage Pcb
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Release the 2 hooks [2] while pushing down the boss [1] with screwdrivers, and remove the Power Supply Cooling Fan [3]. • 1 Boss [1] • 2 Hooks [2] CAUTION: Be sure to insert the [A] part of the Power Supply Cooling Fan [1] to the guide [2] for installation of the fan. Removing the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB ■...
Page 181 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Procedure 1. Remove the Grounding [1]. • 1 Screw [2] • 1 Harness Guide [3] 2. Remove the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB [1] from the guide. • 2 Screws [2] • 5 Claws [3] •...
Page 182: Removing The Motor Fan
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB [1]. • 1 Connector [2] NOTE: When installing the PCB, be sure to fi it with the 4 claws on the bottom side. NOTE: Be sure that the Contact Spring is in the correct position. Removing the Motor Fan ■...
Page 183: Removing The Low Voltage Power Supply Unit
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Procedure 1. Release the 2 claws [1], and pull the tab [2] to remove the Motor Fan [3]. • 1 Connector [4] • 3 Claws [1] Removing the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit ■ Preparation 1.
Page 184: Removing The Secondary Transfer High Voltage Pcb
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Disconnect the connectors [1] on the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit. • 11 Connectors [1] 3. Remove the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit [1]. • 2 Screws [2] Removing the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB ■...
Page 185 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Procedure 1. Remove the 2 Support Plates [1] and the grounding [2]. • 3 Screws [3] • 1 Wire Saddle [4] 2. Remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB [1] from the guide. • 3 Screws [4] •...
Page 186 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Disconnect the 2 connectors [2], and remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB [1]. • 2 Connectors [2] NOTE: Be sure that the Contact Spring is in the correct position.
Page 187: Removing The Control Panel
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Removing the Control Panel ■ Procedure 1. Open the ADF[1], Front Cover[2] and Right Door[3]. 2. Remove the Right Front Upper Cover [1]. • 2 Screws [2] • 2 Hooks [3]...
Page 188 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Close the Front Cover [1]. 4. Raise the Control Panel [1] and remove the Reader Front Cover [2]. • 2 Rubber Caps [3] • 2 Screws [4] • 2 Hooks [5] 5. Remove the Control Panel Cover (Rear). •...
Page 189 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 6. Free the Harnesses [1]. • 1 Wire Saddle [2] • 1 Reuse Band [3] 7. Remove the 3 Harnesses [3]. • 4 Wire Saddles [2] 8. Place a sheet of paper [1] on the Copy Board Glass to prevent damage from the Control Panel.
Page 190 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 9. Remove the 3 Screws[1] on the Control Panel Arm. 10. Turn over the Control Panel [1] and put it on the Copy Board Glass. Place a sheet of paper on the Copy Board Glass to prevent damage from the Control Panel.
Page 191 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 12. Remove the Harness. • 1 Connector [1] 13. Remove the Cable Holder [1]. • 1 Boss [2] • 3 Hooks [3] 14. Disconnect the cables. • 2 Connectors [1]...
Page 192 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 15. Remove the 6 screws [1] securing the Control Panel Rear Cover. • 4 Rubber Caps [2] 16. Turn the Control Panel Rear Cover[1] to remove the Control Panel Left Hinge [2]. • 2 Screws [3] 17.
Page 193 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 18. Remove the Ground Wire [1]. • 1 Screw [2] CAUTION: Check the position of the Boss [3] for slip resistance when attaching the Ground Wire [1]. 19. Remove the Control Panel Right Hinge [1]. •...
Page 194: Removing The Control Panel Cpu Pcb
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 21. Remove the Control Panel Hinge Base [1]. • 3 Screws [2] Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB ■ Preparation 1. Remove the Control Panel.“Removing the Control Panel” on page 165 ■ Procedure 1. Remove the Control Panel CPU PCB [1]. •...
Page 195: Removing The Touch Panel/Lcd Unit And The Control Panel Key Switch Pcb
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Removing the Touch Panel/LCD Unit and the Control Panel Key Switch PCB ■ Preparation 1. Remove the Control Panel CPU PCB.“Removing the Control Panel” on page 165 ■ Procedure CAUTION: Do not touch the surface [A] of the Touch Panel and the surface [B] of the LCD Unit when disassembling/assembling. 1.
Page 196 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Numeric Keypad PCB [1]. • 3 Wire Saddles [2] • Guide [A] • 1 Screw [3] 3. Remove the LCD Holder [1]. • 3 Screws [2] 4. Remove the Control Panel Keys [1].
Page 197 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Remove the Touch Panel [1]. • 3 Claws [2] ■ Actions after Replacement Perform the following adjustment when replacing the Touch Panel and the LCD Unit. Perform Touch Panel adjustment by "simultaneously pressing the service mode top screen > [Settings/Registration] button > "5" button three times"...
Page 198: Original Exposure System
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Original Exposure System Removing the Reader Scanner Unit ■ Procedure 1. Open the ADF Unit. 2. Remove the Glass Retainer (Right) [1] and then remove the Copy Board Glass [2]. • 2 Screws [3] CAUTION: Grease is applied on the 2 Rail Shafts [1] of the Reader Scanner Unit.
Page 199 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Put a sheet of half folded A4 paper[1] under the Reader Scanner Unit. 5. Loosen the 1 Screw [1]. Remove the Belt [3] from the pulley while releasing the Tensioner [2]. 6. Pick up the Reader Scanner Unit [1] and remove the Belt [2]. CAUTION: Do not pull the Reader Scanner Unit or the Flat Cable [1] may be damaged.
Page 200 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 7. Put the Reader Scanner Unit [2] on the sheet of half folded A4 paper [1]. 8. Remove the Flat Cable [2] and the Protection Sheet [3] from the Reader Scanner Unit. • 1 Connector [1] •...
Page 201: Removing The Reader Flat Cable
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning CAUTION: Insert the 4 Edges [1] of the protection sheet to the Guide Part [A]. 9. Actions after Replacement: • Single Pass DADF-A1, B1 : Scanner Unit (Front side) :“Single Pass DADF-A1,B1 : Scanner Unit (Front side)” on page •...
Page 202 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the 3 Flat Cables [1] from the Harness Guide [2]. • 3 Connectors [3] 4. Remove the Reader Connection Plate [1]. • 2 Screws [2] 5. Put the Reader Flat Cable from the hole [1] on the Reader and Remove it from the Guide Guide [2].
Page 203 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 6. Remove the Protection Sheet [1]. • 2 Guides[2] • 2 Claws[3] 7. Remove the double sided tape [1] fixing the Reader Flat Cable. 8. Remove the Reader Flat Cable. • 1 Guide [1]...
Page 204 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Installation Procedure 1. Put the Reader Flat Cable [1] to the reader side and attach it to the guide. 2. Attach the Reader Flat on the Cable through the hole[1] on the reader flame. 3.
Page 205 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Attach the Reader Flat Cable [1] on the Harness Guide[2]. Connect the Reader Flat Cable [1] to the Main Controller PCB. • 3 Connectors [3] 5. Attach the Reader Cable Cover [1]. • 3 Screws [2] •...
Page 206 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 10. Put the Reader Flat Cable along the guide in the figure and attach it to the Reader Scanner Unit with the double sided tape [1]. The distance of differences between [A] and [B] must be under 1.0mm. CAUTION: •...
Page 207: Controller System
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Controller System Removing the Controller Cover ■ Preparation 1. Remove the Cover (Rear Upper). 2. Remove the Right Cover (Rear Upper). ■ Procedure 1. Loosen the 1 screw [2] and remove the Controller Cover [1]. •...
Page 208 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning <Backup List> Backup target data Backup Method User Service Power OFF (excluding DCM) Address List Yes*1 Yes*9 Forwarding Settings Yes*1 Yes*9 Settings / Registration Preferences (Except for Paper Type Management Settings) Yes*9 Yes*10 Adjustment/Maintenance(*) Yes*9 Yes*10 Function Settings (Except for Printer Custom Settings, For- Yes*9...
Page 209 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Backup target data Backup Method User Service Power OFF (excluding DCM) Key and settings information to be used for encryption when Yes*7 TPM is ON Service Mode Service Mode setting values (MN-CON) Yes*9 Yes*10 *1: Remote UI > Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import or Export *2: Remote UI >...
Page 210 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Procedure 1. Remove the 4 cables. • 4 Connectors [1] • 3 Wire Saddles [2]...
Page 211 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the HDD Unit[1]. • 3 Hooks [2] • 1 Screw [3]...
Page 212 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the HDD[1] from the HDD Unit. • 1 Wire Saddle [2] • 4 Screws [3] 4. Remove the Cable[2] from the HDD[1]. ■ Actions after Replacement 1. Format the HDD. Start the machine in safe mode and format all partitions using SST or a USB memory. •...
Page 213: Removing The Main Controller Pcb
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA certificate, ask the user to regenerate them again. Removing the Main Controller PCB ■ Preparation 1. Actions before Replacement:“Main Controller PCB” on page 277 2.
Page 214 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Reader Connection Plate [1]. • 2 Screws [2] 4. Remove the Cable Holder [1] and disconnect the harnesses from left side of the Main Controller PCB Unit. • 2 Hooks[2] • 3 Connectors[3] 5.
Page 215 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 6. Remove all Cables. • 13 Connectors[1] • 1 Flat Cable[2] • 1 Wire Saddle[3] • 2 Reuse Bands[4] 7. Remove the Flat Cable Guide [1]. • 1 Boss[2] • 1 Hook[3] 8. Remove the 2 Screws [2] and remove the Main Controller PCB Unit [1]. •...
Page 216: Removing The Dc Controller Pcb
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 9. When replacing the Main Controller PCB, transfer the following parts from the old PCB to the new PCB. • FLASH PCB • TPM PCB • Memory PCB 10. Actions after Replacement:“Main Controller PCB” on page 277 Removing the DC Controller PCB ■...
Page 217 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Procedure 1. Disconnect the connector. • 3 Wire Saddles [1] 2. Disconnect the cable. • 1 Edge Saddle [2] • 3 Connectors [2]...
Page 218: Removing The Controller Fan
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the FAX Unit [1]. • 2 Screws [2] • 2 Hooks [3] Removing the Controller Fan ■ Preparation 1. Remove the Controller Cover. “Removing the Controller Cover” on page 185 ■ Procedure 1. Remove the 4 fixing pins 1 [1] from the Controller Fan.
Page 219 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Controller Fan[1]. • 1 Connector [2] 3. Remove the 4 fixing pins 2 [1] from rear side of the Controller Fan. CAUTION: Put the Controller Fan in direction of the wind [1] to the heat sink. Install the Controller Fan on the heat sink with keep inserting position of the fixing pin 2 [2] as shown below.
Page 220: Laser Exposure System
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Laser Exposure System Removing the Laser Scanner Unit ■ Preparation 1. Pull out the Cassette 1. 2. Open the Waste Toner Assembly Cover. 3. Remove the Left Cover (Upper). ■ Procedure 1. Grasp and lift up the handle [1] to release the protrusion [2], and pull out the Laser Scanner Unit [3] to the position in the following figure.
Page 221: Cleaning The Dustproof Glass
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Laser Scanner Unit [1]. CAUTION: When installing, be sure to fit the protrusion [1] of the Laser Scanner Unit with a hole [2] in the plate. CAUTION: Do not disassemble the Laser Scanner Unit because it requires adjustment. ■...
Page 222 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool [1]. 3. Insert the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool [1] into the hole [2], and clean the glass by moving it back and forth 2 to 3 times in the [A] part. CAUTION: Do not insert the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool upside down.
Page 223: Image Formation System
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Image Formation System Removing the Drum Unit CAUTION: If you perform work while in Deep sleep mode or when the power is turned OFF while in Deep sleep mode, the Primary Transfer Roller isl not be disengaged. When removing the Drum Unit (Bk), be sure to do so after returning the machine to a standby state.
Page 224: Removing The Developing Unit
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Pinch the light-blue [A] part, and pull out the Drum Unit [1]. CAUTION: Since there is a risk of damaging the Photosensitive Drum, do not touch the surface. Be sure to block light to the removed Drum Unit using paper, otherwise it will be exposed to light. CAUTION: The illustration is explaining by using the Drum Unit (Y) as a reference.
Page 225: Installing The Developing Unit
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Procedure 1. Remove the screw [1]. • 1 Screw [1] 2. Pull out the Developing Unit [1] to the position in the figure below, disconnect the connector [2], and hook it on the groove in the Front Inner Upper Cover [3]. •...
Page 226 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Before installing the Developing Unit, orient the Front Cover [1] upwards, and shake the unit strongly up and down approx. 10 times with its angle unchanged [2]. 60° CAUTION: If the Developing Unit is installed with toner uneven in the container, the screw may be broken and E020/E021 error may occur.
Page 227 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Insert the Developing Unit up to the position in the figure below. CAUTION: Take care to prevent the connector of the Developing Unit from getting caught. 6. Disconnect the connector [1] from the groove in the Front Inner Upper Cover , and connect it to the Developing Unit.
Page 228 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 7. Slowly insert the Developing Unit up to the position where it is to be secured with a screw. CAUTION: If you insert it abruptly, toner may scatter on the rear side inside the machine when the shutter opens. 8.
Page 229: Removing The Waste Toner Container
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning NOTE: Check the Service Mode the parts counters are cleared. • COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > DV-UNT-Y • COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > DV-UNT-M • COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > DV-UNT-C • COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > DV-UNT-K 2.
Page 230: Removing The Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Removed the Waste Toner Assembly. NOTE: Parts counter is cleared automatically when the Waste Toner Assembly is replaced after the preparation alarm is displayed. NOTE: Replacing the Waste Toner Container after the preparation warning has been displayed clears the parts counter automatically. •...
Page 231: Removing The Itb Unit
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning CAUTION: • Remove the Protection Sheet [1] from the replacing Secondary Transfer Outer Roller after installation. • Pull the tape [2] on the Protection Sheet [1] in the direction of the arrow to remove the sheet. NOTE: When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode.
Page 232 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Removing the ITB Unit 1. Pull the lever [1] to unlock it, grasp the handle [A] on the left and right, and pull the ITB Unit [2] to the position in the figure below while shifting it to the left side. 2.
Page 233 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning CAUTION: • Pull the lever [1] to unlock it, grasp the handle [A] on the left and right, and pull the ITB Unit [2] to the position in the figure below while shifting it to the left side. Left Side •...
Page 234: Removing The Itb Cleaning Blade
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ After Removing the ITB Unit ● After Removing the ITB Unit 1. Open the shutter [1], and clean the Patch Sensor [2] using the blower [3]. After cleaning, check that there is no soiling caused by toner on the surface of the sensor. If the soiling cannot be removed, perform next step. 2.
Page 235: Removing The Itb
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Procedure 1. Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Retainer [1]. • 2 Screws [2] • 2 Gears [3] • 1 Clasp [4] (Used when removing the ITB) 2. Remove the Cleaning Blade [1]. • 2 Bosses [2] NOTE: When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode.
Page 236 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Procedure 1. Push the Tension Guide [1] to loosen the tension of the ITB, and secure the guide using the clasp [2]. • 3 Hooks [3] 2. Stand the ITB Unit, and secure it by using the ITB Cleaning Blade [1] as a base. •...
Page 237 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning CAUTION: • When installing/ removing the Left Handle, align the holes [1] and [2] in a straight line. • When installing/ removing the Left Handle, align the holes [1] and [2] in a straight line.
Page 238 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Tension Roller Retainer [1]. • 2 Hooks [2] CAUTION: When installing the Tension Roller Retainer, do so in the order of (1) spring, (2) rib and (3) Shaft Hole. 5. Remove the ITB Tension Roller [1].
Page 239: Removing The Primary Transfer Roller (Y/M/C/Bk)
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 6. Remove the ITB [1]. CAUTION: Install the ITB by inserting paper between the belt and the frame as shown in the figure below. • A new ITB comes with dedicated paper. NOTE: When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode. •...
Page 240: Removing The Patch Sensor Unit
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Procedure 1. Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade [1], and lay down the ITB Unit such that the Primary Transfer Roller is visible. 2. Remove the Primary Transfer Roller Retainer Member [1]. 3. Remove the Primary Transfer Roller [1]. NOTE: When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode.
Page 241 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Preparation 1. Remove the Registration Guide Unit.“Removing the Registration Guide Unit” on page 269 2. Remove the ITB Unit.“Removing the ITB Unit” on page 209 ■ Procedure 1. Remove the 2 Harness Guides [1]. •...
Page 242: Removing The Waste Toner Drive Unit
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Execute auto gradation adjustment. 3. After executing auto gradation adjustment, check the alarm log such as10-0006/10-0007 is not occurred. When an alarm occurs, perform a remedy according to the instruction of the alarm. Removing the Waste Toner Drive Unit ■...
Page 243 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Procedure 1. Remove the white member [1] using a flat-blade screwdriver. • 1 Claw [2] 2. Remove the Duplex Merging Motor [1] and the Registration Motor [2]. • 2 Connectors [3] • 4 Screws [4]]...
Page 244: Removing The Main Drive Unit
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Registration Drive Unit [1]. • 2 Screws [2] • 3 Claws [3] NOTE: When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode. •...
Page 245 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Procedure 1. Remove the DC Controller PCB Unit .[1] • 12 Wire Saddles • 27 Connectors • 3 Screws 2. Remove the Main Drive Unit[1]. • 9 Screws [2]...
Page 246 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning NOTE: Removing the Main Drive Unit : Rear Plate Controller Box Hook Main Drive Unit Low Voltage Power Suppy Unit 1. Release the hook of the Main Drive Unit from the Rear Plate. 2. Pull out the Main Drive Unit approx. 10 mm horizontally.
Page 247: Removing The Lifter Drive Assembly
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove it from the lower direction so as not to hit the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit. CAUTION: Use caution to pull out the Main Drive Unit fully and horizontally. Otherwise, the coupling may be caught on the Rear Plate and be damaged.
Page 248 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Procedure CAUTION: • Although 1 or 2 cables are equipped with the Lifter Drive Unit by specification, the operation is not different. • 2 cables are equipped with the service part of the Lifter Drive Unit. Connect 1 of them as shown in the figure.
Page 249 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning...
Page 250: Removing The Drum Cleaning Pre-Exposure Led Unit
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Removing the Drum Cleaning Pre-exposure LED Unit ■ Preparation 1. Remove the Main Controller PCB.“Removing the Main Controller PCB” on page 191 2. Remove the Main Drive Unit.“Removing the Main Drive Unit” on page 222 ■...
Page 251: Remove The Bottle Drive Unit (Ym)/(Cbk)
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the 4 Pre-exposure LEDs [1]. 1 Claw [2] 3. Remove the guide [1] of the Pre-exposure LED. ■ Adjustment after Replacement The following procedure can also be performed in [Service Mode > SITUATION > Parts Replacement > Adjustment at replacement of the Pre-exposure LED Unit ].
Page 252 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Remove the Toner Bottle. 6. Remove the Left Cover Assembly (Rear). 7. Remove the First Delivery Tray. CAUTION: Be sure to place a sheet of paper during the work to prevent the drum from being exposed to light and damaged. ■...
Page 253 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Depending on the model, perform one of the following operation. • Remove the Toner Bottle Mount (Upper) [1] (Y, M, C). • 2 Hooks [2] • 1 Boss [3] • Remove the Toner Bottle Mount (Upper) [1] (BK). •...
Page 254 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Toner Bottle Mount (Lower) [1]. • 2 Claws [2] • 2 Hooks [3] 4. Depending on the model, perform one of the following operation. • Free the harness of the Bottle Drive Unit (YM). •...
Page 255: Removing The Waste Toner Gear Holder
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Remove the Bottle Drive Unit [1]. • 2 Bosses [2] • 5 Hooks [3] CAUTION: Be sure to remove the Anti-vibration Sheet before replacing the Bottle Drive Unit. Removing the Waste Toner Gear Holder ■...
Page 256 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Procedure 1. Remove the Waste Toner Gear Holder [1]. • 1 Claw [2] • 2 Hooks [3] • 3 Bosses [4] CAUTION: Hang the hook [A] on the upper side of the Waste Toner Gear Holder onto the edge [B] of the plate to secure it.
Page 257: Removing The Waste Toner Feed Unit
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning CAUTION: Be sure to check that boss [a] and [C] (three places in total) have not come off. CAUTION: Be sure to check that there is no gap between the Waste Toner Gear Holder and the mounting parts. Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit ■...
Page 258 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Remove the Front Door. 6. Remove the Toner Bottle. 7. Remove the Drum Unit. 8. Remove the Developing Unit. 9. Remove the Left Cover (Upper). 10. Remove the First Delivery Tray. 11. Remove the Toner Bottle Mount. 12.
Page 259 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the First Delivery Tray [1]. • 2 Protrusions [2] for each 3. Remove the Drum Rail Units [1] and free the harness [2] from the guide only for Bk. • 1 Screw [3] for each •...
Page 260 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Developing Stay Units [1]. 5. Remove the Waste Toner Feed Unit [1]. • 2 Hooks [2] CAUTION: When removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit, be careful not to turn it over.
Page 261: Removing The Intermediate Guide
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Removing the Intermediate Guide ■ Preparation NOTE: If waste toner has overflowed onto the Intermediate Guide, this waste toner can be fed into the Waste Toner Container by operating the Waste Toner Feed Motor (M17). •...
Page 262 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Release the 2 links [1] of the Bottle Motor. CAUTION: When installing the links of the Bottle Motor, be sure to pinch the Lock Arm [1]. 3. Remove the Front Inner Upper Cover [1]. •...
Page 263 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Front Inner Lower Cover [1]. • 4 Screws [2] 5. Remove the Intermediate Guide [1]. • 1 Screw [2] • 1 Hook [3]...
Page 264: Fixing System
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Fixing System Removing the Fixing Unit 1. Open the Right Door. 2. Grasp the Light-Blue Handle [1] and remove the Fixing Unit [2]. NOTE: When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode. •...
Page 265 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Fixing Left Cover[1]. • 2 Claws [2] 3. Rotate the Fixing Unit 180 degrees. 4. Remove the Fixing Right Cover [1]. • 2 Claws [2] CAUTION: Do not remove the cover abruptly as the harnesses are connected inside the cover.
Page 266 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Disconnect the 3 connectors [1]. • 3 Connectors [1] 6. Rotate the Fixing Unit 90 degrees. 7. Open the left and right Fixing Pressure Levers [1].
Page 267 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 8. Remove the 2 springs [1] from the left and right Fixing Pressure Levers. 9. Return the Fixing Pressure Lever [1]. 10. Open the Fixing Lower Cover [1].
Page 268: Removing The Fixing Pressure Roller / Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft Support
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 11. Free the harness [1] from the Harness Guide [2] and remove the Fixing Film Unit [3]. CAUTION: When installing the Fixing Film Unit [1], be sure to align the grooves on the right and left with the rail [3]. NOTE: When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode.
Page 269 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Procedure 1. Open the guide [1]. 2. Remove the Fixing Pressure Roller [1]. 3. Remove the Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft Support [1].
Page 270: Removing The Fixing Drive Unit
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning NOTE: When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode. • COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-LW-RL • COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-LW-BS It is also cleared at the same time when FX-UNIT is cleared.
Page 271: Pickup Feed System
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Pickup Feed System Removing the Pickup/Feed/Separation Roller (Cassette 1/2,Cassette 3/4(Option)) ■ Preparation 1. Open the Right Door (Lower) or the Cassette Right Door Assembly . • Cassette 1/2: Right Door (Lower) • Cassette 3/4: Cassette Right Door Assembly 2.
Page 272: Removing The Multi-Purpose Tray / Feed / Separation Roller
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Removing the Multi-purpose Tray / Feed / Separation Roller 1. Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray. 2. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller Cover [1]. • 1 Claw [2] • 2 Bosses [3] 3. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller [1] and the Feed Roller [2]. 4.
Page 273 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 5. Raise the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller [1] with the shaft as the center, and pull it out from the shaft. NOTE: If you have accidentally removed the shaft together with the roller, install it from the front side. NOTE: When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode.
Page 274: Removing The Right Door Unit
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning CAUTION: • A Paper jam may occur when the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller is not inserted properly, be sure to insert it all the way to the correct position. • When installing the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller Cover, fit part (1) first and then fit part (2) with the 3 bosses and 1 claw.
Page 275 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 7. Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray. ■ Procedure 1. Remove the Wire Fixation Member [1]. • 1 Claw [2] • 3 Hooks [3] 2. Free the wire [2] from the Wire Fixation Member [1] and pass it through the hole [A] in the Right Door.
Page 276 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Close the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Tray. 4. Remove the Harness[1] from the Harness Guide[2]. • 1 Connector [3] • 1 Clamp [4] 5. Fully open the Right Door . 6. Remove the Link Gear [1]. •...
Page 277: Removing The First Delivery Unit
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the link by pulling the Lever Assembly (Rear) [2] toward the outside at the position [A] of the Stopper Rail and opening the door. NOTE: • Bend the [A] part when removing the Lever Assembly (the figure shows the Stopper Rail on the rear side). •...
Page 278 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Fixing Unit.“Removing the Fixing Unit” on page 242 4. Remove the Second Delivery Unit.“Removing the Second Delivery Unit” on page 257 ■ Procedure 1. Free the harness [1] from the Harness Guide [2]. •...
Page 279: Removing The Second Delivery Unit
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Removing the Second Delivery Unit ■ Preparation 1. Open the Right Door. 2. Remove the Right Cover (Rear Upper). ■ Procedure 1. Pull out the Second Delivery Unit. • 4 Screws • 1 Wire Saddle 2.
Page 280: Removing The Third Delivery Unit
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Remove the Second Delivery Unit. CAUTION: If you overly pull out the right side of the Second Delivery Unit, the 2 bosses may be damaged. Removing the Third Delivery Unit 1. Fully open the Right Door.“Fully open the Right Door”...
Page 281 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning ■ Procedure 1. Remove the Right Door Link (Left) [1] and Right Door Link (Right) [2]. 2. Remove the Connector Cover [1]. • 1 Claw [2] • 1 Hook [3] 3. Free the harness [1] from the Harness Guide [2]. •...
Page 282: Removing The Cassette 2 Pickup Unit
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit [1]. • 4 Screws [2] NOTE: Remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit [2] while pulling it out along the [A] part of the Right Door Shaft Support Block [1] on the left side.
Page 283: Removing The Cassette 3/4 Pickup Unit (Option)
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 6. Remove the Right Cover (Front Lower) and Right Door (Lower) ■ Procedure 1. Remove the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit [1]. • 1 Connector [2] • 4 Screws [3] Removing the Cassette 3/4 Pickup Unit (Option) ■...
Page 284 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 8. Remove the Cassette Cover (Right Rear) and remove the Cassette Right Door. 9. Remove the Cassette Right Cover (Lower). ■ Procedure 1. Release the connector [1] of the Harness Guide. • 2 Connectors [1]...
Page 285: Removing The Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Remove the Cassette Right Door Open/Close Detection Switch [1]. • 1 Screw [2] • 2 Hooks [3] 3. Remove the Pickup Unit [1]. • 4 Screws [2] Removing the Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller ■...
Page 286 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 2. Orient the tabs of the 2 bushings [1] upward. 3. Lift up the left bushing [1], and remove the Shaft Spacer [2]. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop off the Shaft Spacer[2]. CAUTION: Be sure to push the Shaft Spacer from above all the way down.
Page 287 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the Vertical Path Roller [1]. CAUTION: Be careful not to drop off the 2 bushings [2]. 5. Remove the 2 bushings [1]. CAUTION: • Replace the Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller simultaneously with the Registration Roller as rolling speed is controlled by the roller consumable amount.
Page 288: Removing The Registration Roller
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Removing the Registration Roller ■ Preparation 1. Fully open the Right Door.“Fully open the Right Door” on page 154 ■ Procedure 1. Remove the Secondary Transfer Guide Retainer [1]. • 1 Screw [2] 2. Release the protrusion by bending the hook [1] on the Secondary Transfer Guide. 3.
Page 289 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 4. Remove the gear [1]. • 1 Claw [2] 5. Remove the E-ring [1]. 6. Remove the Registration Roller [1]. 7. Remove the Spacer (Right) [1] and Spacer (Left) [2].
Page 290 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning CAUTION: Replace the Registration Roller simultaneously with the Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller as rolling speed is controlled by the roller consumable amount. NOTE: When the consumable parts have been replaced, be sure to clear the parts counter shown below in service mode. •...
Page 291: Removing The Registration Guide Unit
4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning Removing the Registration Guide Unit ■ Preparation 1. Fully open the Right Door.“Fully open the Right Door” on page 154 2. Remove the Front Cover.“Removing the Front Door” on page 154 ■ Procedure 1. Remove the right side of the Registration Guide Unit [1]. •...
Page 292 4. Parts Replacement and Cleaning 3. Release the 2 protrusions and pull out the Registration Guide Unit [2]. CAUTION: Be careful of the connector on the back. 4. Disconnect the connector [1]. • 1 Connector [1] • 1 Wire Saddle [2]...
Page 293: Adjustment
Adjustment Pickup Feed System......272 Document Exposure System.....275 Actions after Replacement....277...
Page 294: Pickup Feed System
5. Adjustment Pickup Feed System Image Position Adjustment CAUTION: Adjusting the 1st side also changes the margin on the 2nd side. If the difference between the 1st and the 2nd sides is within +/- 0.5 mm, do not adjust the 2nd side. Reference: Standard Value Leading edge: 4.0+1.5/-1.0mm (front side, back side) Left edge: 2.5+/-1.5mm (front side) / 2.5+/-2.0mm (back side)
Page 295 5. Adjustment 3. Loosen the fixation screw. 4. Move the Adjustment Plate left or right according to the scale value checked in step 2 (as the Adjustment Plate is moved toward the left on the machine by 1 tooth, the left edge margin is increased by 0.5mm). Scale Teeth 5.
Page 296 5. Adjustment 6. Pull out the next upper cassette, and check that the Adjustment Plate is correctly pushed against the frame. CAUTION: • If the Adjustment Plate is not correctly pushed against the frame, image cannot be correctly adjusted. • When checking with the Cassette 3, the cassette front cover must be removed. 7.
Page 297: Document Exposure System
5. Adjustment Document Exposure System Service Mode Backup • The machine is adjusted one by one at the factory shipment and the adjustment values are written on the service label. • The service label is affixed to the back of the Reader Front Cover. •...
Page 298 5. Adjustment When backup is performed normally 4. Enter the values written on the service label inside of the Reader Front Cover. • COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X • COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y • COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > STRD-POS •...
Page 299: Actions After Replacement
5. Adjustment Actions after Replacement Main Controller PCB 1. Upgrade the firmware to make the combination of firmware appropriate so that the machine operates normally. NOTE: The use of automatic update function is recommended. 2. Depending on the status of backup, perform one of the following measures. When backup is performed normally Execute the following service mode (Lv.2) to restore the backup data.
Page 300: Dc Controller Pcb
5. Adjustment 5. Execute either AB or Inch configuration tray width adjustment on the following service mode. To execute AB configuration adjustment 1. Align the Slide Guide with "A4/A3". 2. Press the OK key, and register the width of A4 on the following service mode. •...
Page 301: Patch Sensor Unit
5. Adjustment 2. Write the following service setting values on the service label in the front cover according the replaced colour of the developing unit. • COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > D-Y-LVL • COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > D-M-LVL •...
Page 302 5. Adjustment 3. Check the chart and enter the value in the least part of the color displacement between -4 to 4. 9 settings of LS-H-xx LS-H-xx Distortion Correction: Vertical Scanning Direction 1. Clear the offset value of distortion correction on the following service mode. •...
Page 303: Single Pass Dadf-A1,B1 : Scanner Unit (Front Side)
5. Adjustment 3. Check the chart and enter the value in the least part of the color displacement between -4 to 4. 9 settings of LS-V-xx LS-V-xx Single Pass DADF-A1,B1 : Scanner Unit (Front side) 1. Enter the service setting values packaged in the Scanner Unit content. •...
Page 304: Single Pass Dadf-A1,B1 : Scanner Unit (Back Side)
5. Adjustment 6. Enter the service setting values written on the service label inside of the Reader Front Cover. COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-RG COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > 100-GB COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > SH-TRGT COPIER >...
Page 305: Copyboard Glass
5. Adjustment 2. Set a sheet of paper on ADF Document Pickup Tray. • COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL2 3. Set a sheet of paper on the Copy Board Glass. • COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL3 4.
Page 306: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Initial Check........285 Test Print...........286 Troubleshooting Items.......291 Debug Log.........304...
Page 307: Initial Check
6. Troubleshooting Initial Check Initial check items list Item Detail Check Site Environment The voltage of the power supply is as rated (±10%). The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifi er), and it is not in a cold place. The machine is not near a source of fi re or dust.
Page 308: Test Print
6. Troubleshooting Test Print Overview This machine have the following test print TYPE and you can judge the image failure that is checked as “Yes” in the following image check items with each test print. If the image failure occurred on normal output does not reappear on the test print, it may be caused by the PDL input or reader side.
Page 309: How To Use The Test Print
6. Troubleshooting 7. Press start key. How to use the test print ■ 16 gradations (TYPE=4) This test print is for mainly checking the gradation, fogging, white line and uneven density at front & rear. Check item Check method Assumed cause Gradation Check that 16 density gradation is properly reproduced.
Page 310 6. Troubleshooting NOTE: Various settings can be configured in the following service mode. • The print by developing color COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-Y COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-M COPIER > TEST > PG > COLOR-C COPIER >...
Page 311 6. Troubleshooting ■ MCYBk horizontal stripe (TYPE=10) This test print is for mainly checking the dark area density of each color, each color balance and white line on development. Check items Check method Assumed cause Uneven density Check that uneven density does not appear on solid area of each Failure of Laser Scanner Unit color Failure of developer in Drum Unit...
Page 312 6. Troubleshooting ■ Full color 16-gradations (TYPE=14) Light areas White White This test print is for mainly checking the gray balance, gradations of YMCBk singe color and fogging. Check item Check method Assumed cause Gradation Check that 64 gradations density is properly reproduced in each color. Failure of Drum Unit Failure of Laser Scanner Unit Fogging Check that fogging appears on white image area only.
Page 313: Troubleshooting Items
“Inaccurate Right Angle at the Paper Trailing Edge” on page Display of "Non-Canon Product" Message “ Display of "Non-Canon Product" Message” on page 299 ■ The ITB Unit Cannot Be Removed Due to a Disengagement Error of the Primary Transfer Roller...
Page 314 6. Troubleshooting 4. Turn the flat-blade screwdriver until the pressure of the ITB is released. 5. Remove the Drum Unit. 6. Remove the ITB Unit. ■ Forcible stop of paper feed Function Overview Forcibly stop the paper at a specified position. Next time a job occurs, the paper is forcibly stopped at the stop position (leading edge) shown in the figure...
Page 315 6. Troubleshooting [70] [71] [40,41] [32,33] [30,31,99] [20,21] [72] Use case • When bent paper/skew/wrinkles occur • When jam occurs frequently • When checking an image on the ITB Points to note when using • Remove the paper being stopped with the normal jam removal procedure. After jam removal, the job is automatically recovered.
Page 316 6. Troubleshooting Stop positions and check items Items that can be checked differ depending on the position where paper stops. Check for fold/skew/crease/operation check/jam/checking of image on ITB with reference to the table below. Stop position Fold Skew Crease Operation Checking on im- check / Jam age on ITB...
Page 317 6. Troubleshooting REAR REAR FRONT FRONT Cause If there is a difference in height at the front and at the rear of the Fixing Unit, paper proceeds unevenly when it passes through the fixing nip and the symptom occurs. If the front side is lower, paper on the front side proceeds less smoothly than the rear side, and the image on the front side shrinks [a].
Page 318 6. Troubleshooting 2. Grasp the light-blue handle [1], and remove the Fixing Unit [2]. 3. Open and slightly lift up the Front Door [1], and remove it while pushing the claw [2]. • 1 Claw [2] • 2 Bosses [3] 4.
Page 319 6. Troubleshooting 6. Remove the Delivery Outlet Side Cover [1]. • 1 Screw [2] 7. Pull out the Cassette 1 [1], and open the Cassette Side Cover [2]. • 2 Screws [3] 8. Disconnect the connector [1] of the Front Fan.
Page 320 6. Troubleshooting 9. Open the Front Fan [1], and disconnect the connector [2]. • 2 Screws [3] • 1 Claw [4] 10. Remove the Front Fan [1].
Page 321 13. Output the image where the symptom occurred, and check that the symptom does not occur. If the symptom persists, check for other factors. ■ Display of "Non-Canon Product" Message The following shows the remedy to be performed when a "non-Canon product" message is displayed even though Canon-made toner is used. Remedy:...
Page 322 6. Troubleshooting 1. Toner Bottle Alarm code: At the same time, 10-0091 - 0094 occurs. ■ Remedies to be performed when E602-xxxx or E614-xxxx error is displayed Remedy procedure for E602 or E614 differs according to the status of the screen where error is displayed. Check the remedy procedure by referring to the following flow chart.
Page 323 6. Troubleshooting Start Confirmation or judgment (1) Check cable connector connected to HDD and restart the machine. Detail change of initialization and /or Inspection (2) Did the machine start and the issue solved? Initialization and /or inspection fails and related parts are replaced Automatic process (3) Shift to the hard disk of the machine...
Page 324 6. Troubleshooting 3. If the machine is not started normally, execute key operation to shift to the service mode for shifting to hard disk maintenance mode. [1] : CHK TYPE [2] : HD CHECK [3] : HD CLEAR [4] : HD OPERATION CANCEL +------------------------------------+ E602-0801 +------------------------------------+...
Page 325 6. Troubleshooting 9. Consider the HDD cannot be restored, select [4] and cancel the schedule. Switch OFF the main power of the machine. [1] : CHK TYPE [2] : HD CHECK [3] : HD CLEAR [4] : HD OPERATION CANCEL ------------------------------------------------- [4] has been selected Turn OFF the main power.
Page 326: Debug Log
6. Troubleshooting Debug Log Function Overview As for debug log, following logs are available: continuous log that saves the operation log, automatic log that is saved when an event occurs, manual log which is collected and saved each time at log saving, packet log, and key operation log. Host machine Host machine Main Controller...
Page 327 • When the failure occurs only at the customer's site and cannot be reproduced by the department in charge of quality management or Canon Inc. ■ Sublogs Sublog is the general term for the unified logs for analyzing problem in which operation histories of software modules are compiled as debug logs.
Page 328 6. Troubleshooting [Settings/Registration] > Management Settings > License/Other > Register License NOTE: To register a license, it is necessary to request the Support Dept. of the sales company to issue a license. CAUTION: When collecting network packet logs using this function, be sure to obtain user's permission in advance by explaining about CAUTION: In the case of a heavy-load network environment, some of the packets may be left uncollected.
Page 329 6. Troubleshooting ■ Flow of Determining the Procedure for Collecting Logs Check the following flow to determine the procedure for collecting logs according to the type of problem. Service call for trouble Does the problem repeat restart? Key operation logs need to be collected Does the problem cause the Control Panel to be locked?
Page 330: Saving And Collecting Debug Logs
6. Troubleshooting Procedure for Collecting Logs Log Collection Procedure List Problem Details of Problem DEBUG SRAM Procedure for Obtaining Logs Case PCB ASS'Y Board Case A Problem that repeats re- Necessary 1. Refer to “Preparation” on page 310 and make the preparations such start as installing the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS'Y Board or change the set- tings.
Page 331 6. Troubleshooting CAUTION: Be sure to check that the USB device has 1 GB or more of free space before collecting a log. If capacity of the USB device is insufficient, logs that failed to be saved will be deleted so that analysis of the symptom cannot be performed.
Page 332 6. Troubleshooting 5. Collecting log files Start the machine in download mode, and save (collect) the log files to a USB device or a PC. CAUTION: In the case of analysis using Sublog, the following information needs to be obtained together with the Sublog. •...
Page 333 6. Troubleshooting 3. Refer to “Flow of Determining the Procedure for Collecting Logs” on page 307 and when it is judged that collection of the network packet logs is required, enable the network packet log collection function by following the procedure shown below and start the function.
Page 334 6. Troubleshooting NOTE: • A value between 0 and 99999 can be set, but make sure to set the value instructed by the Support Dept. of your sales company. Operations are not guaranteed when value other than the above is set. •...
Page 335 6. Troubleshooting Setting the payload drop function 1. To enable this setting, set "1" in the following service mode (Lv.2). COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP > PAYLOAD • 0: Not drop the payload (factory default settings) • 1: Drop the payload The obtained packet data includes a header part and data part.
Page 336 6. Troubleshooting 2. Check that "Storing System Information..." is displayed on the Control Panel. • For platform version 3.7 or later, following screen is displayed. Save screen for platform version 3.7 or later • For the platform version 3.6 or earlier, following message is displayed. Massage during saving logs for platform version 3.6 or earlier CAUTION: •...
Page 337 6. Troubleshooting 1. Execute the following service mode to save report files to the HDD. COPIER > Function > MISC-P > RPT-FILE 2. Execute the following service mode with the USB device connected to the host machine to collect the report stored in the HDD into the USB device.
Page 338 6. Troubleshooting 2. Execute the following service mode. COPIER > Function > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD 3. The host machine will enter download mode. Press [8] on the Numeric Keypad. [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ Root Menu (USB) <v25.12> ] ] ] ] ] ] ] ] (v25.12) ------------------------------------------------------- [ 1 ] : Select Version [ 4 ] : Clear/Format...
Page 339 6. Troubleshooting 6. When downloading the log files is complete, the following message will appear. Press any key. --- Please press any keys --- [68/102]20170405̲0949-57-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [69/102]20170405̲0908-19-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [70/102]20170404̲1822-52-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [71/102]20170404̲1702-57-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [97/102]20170322̲1324-37-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [98/102]20170322̲1204-56-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [99/102]20170322̲1102-52-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [100/102]20170322̲0954-48-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [101/102]20170322̲0848-16-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin [102/102]20170322̲0803-33-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin Sub log full Download OK. ---Please press any keys--- Do not turn OFF the power without..● Saving to a PC with SST installed Follow the procedure shown below to save (collect) Sublogs to a PC using SST.
Page 340 6. Troubleshooting 4. Check that continuous logs are stored in the device. When connection with the device is completed, the screen shown below will appear. Select [Upload Data]. The set of data stored in the device is shown on the right. Click "+" at "Log" to expand the tree, and check that there are continuous logs (date_model number_clog.bin).
Page 341 6. Troubleshooting ● Checking the Saved Files NOTE: If log files are stored in the USB flash drive, the path to the storage destination is different by the platform version. Platform version prior to 3.7 They are stored in the root directory of USB flash drive. Platform version 3.7 or later Folders of "iA_sublog"...
Page 342 6. Troubleshooting 20170322_0803-33-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170322_0848-16-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170322_0954-48-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170322_1102-52-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170413_1408-46-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170413_1409-12-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170413_1455-57-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin 20170414_00-26-ZZZ00000-V2512_SAFE.bin 20170414_0843-44-ZZZ00000-2512-clog.bin LOGLIST.TXT sxldlog_2017-04-14_00-28-22.bin 20161013_1733-36_ZZZ99999_1406_clog.bin Serial Number Data and time when a file Firmware Version was archived (year, month, Identification indicating day, hour, minute, second). that it is a continuous log File name of continuous log How to check the manual log files and automatic (event) log files The manual log files and automatic (event) log files are stored in the log file storage location.
Page 343: Service Mode Relating To Debug Logs
6. Troubleshooting 20161012_14-48_ZZZ99999_V1406_Fatal00-exception Serial Number Data and time when Cause of occurrence Firmware Version an even occurred (year, month, day, hour, minute, second). 20161012_14-48_ZZZ99999_V1406_ServiceCall-E719-0031 Cause of occurrence Serial Number Data and time when Firmware Version an even occurred (year, month, day, hour, minute, second). File name of automatic log How to check the network packet log files The network packet log file is stored in the "NC + date"...
Page 344 6. Troubleshooting NOTE: If log collection is continued or setting change is repeated when an abnormality is found in operation of the function related to debug logs, temporary files or log files may be remained in the machine. In that case, execute "DEFAULT" in service mode to clear the settings related to debug logs and repeat the operation again.
Page 345: Error/Jam/Alarm
Error/Jam/Alarm Outline..........324 Error Code.........328 Error Code (FAX)......466 Alarm Code........469 Jam Code..........517...
Page 346: Outline
7. Error/Jam/Alarm Outline This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the product. These are classified into 3 codes as follows. Code type Explanation Error code This code is displayed when an error occurs on the machine. Jam code This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine.
Page 347: Pickup Position Code
7. Error/Jam/Alarm Pickup Position Code When a jam occurs, the pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code. (On the jam display screen, the pickup position code is shown in the "P" column.) Display example of pickup position code Pickup position code Pickup position At Finisher jam/At error avoidance jam/At ADF jam without pickup operation (at SEND, Inbox, etc.)
Page 348 7. Error/Jam/Alarm Display Paper Size Display Paper Size LDRFB LEDGERFULLBLEED LEGAL LETTER A3FB A3FULLBLEED EXECUTIVE STMT STATEMENT 10x8 10x8 12x18 12x18 13x19 13x19 I-B0 ISOB0 15x11 15x11 I-B1 ISOB1 17x22 17x22 I-B2 ISOB2 18x24 18x24 I-B3 ISOB3 A-FLS Australian-FOOLSCAP I-B4 ISOB4 ALGL Argentina-LEGAL...
Page 349: Points To Note When Clearing Mn-Con
7. Error/Jam/Alarm Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON • Execution of clearing MN-COM deletes all data in Address Book, Forwarding Settings, Settings/Registration (Adjustment/ Maintenance, Function Settings, Set Destination, Management Settings, TPM Settings), etc. Before execution of this operation, ask user to back up the data and get approval for this operation. •...
Page 350: Error Code
7. Error/Jam/Alarm Error Code E001-0001-05 Fixing Main Thermistor high temperature detection error Detection Description The Fixing Main Thermistor detected a high temperature error. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Fixing Unit - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (J115) and the AC Driver PCB (J505) - Harness between the AC Driver PCB and the Fixing Unit - Fixing Unit - Fixing Drive Unit...
Page 351: E001-0004-05 Fixing Main Thermistor High Temperature Detection Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E001-0004-05 Fixing Main Thermistor high temperature detection error Detection Description The Fixing Main Thermistor detected a high temperature error. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Fixing Unit - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (J115) and the AC Driver PCB (J505) - Harness between the AC Driver PCB and the Fixing Unit - Fixing Unit - Fixing Drive Unit...
Page 352: E002-0001-05 Fixing Main Thermistor Temperature Increase Detection Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E002-0001-05 Fixing Main Thermistor temperature increase detection error Detection Description The Fixing Main Thermistor did not detect temperature increase for 5 sec or longer when the Fixing Heater was turned ON until start of PI control. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Fixing Unit - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (J115) and the AC Driver PCB (J505) - Harness between the AC Driver PCB and the Fixing Unit...
Page 353: E002-0004-05 Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) Open Circuit Detection Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E002-0004-05 Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) open circuit detection error Detection Description The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) detected a temperature of 40 deg C or lower for 3 sec or longer from when the Fixing Heater was turned ON until start of PI control. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Fixing Unit...
Page 354: E003-0006-05 Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) Low Temperature Detection Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E003-0006-05 Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) low temperature detection error Detection Description The Fixing Sub Thermistor (Rear) detected a temperature of 80 deg C or lower for 1 sec or longer from start of PI control until completion of the last rotation (the Fixing Heater was turned OFF). Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Fixing Unit...
Page 355: E009-0000-05 Fixing Pressure Timeout Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E009-0000-05 Fixing pressure timeout error Detection Description The Fixing Pressure Release Sensor did not detect ON status within 10 sec after the start of pressure application operation for fixing. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN049/J119) and the Fixing Pressure Release Sensor (PS13) - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN049/J123) and the Fixing Motor (M09) - Fixing Unit...
Page 356: E010-0001-05: Bk Drum_Itb Motor Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E010-0001-05 Bk Drum_ITB Motor error Detection Description It did not become the specified speed although have passed from the startup of the Bk Drum_ITB Motor in the Main Drive Unit. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the Bk Drum/ITB Motor and the DC Controller PCB - Bk Drum Unit [0313-0000] - ITB Unit [0600-0000] - ITB Cleaning Blade...
Page 357: E010-0003-05: Bk Drum_Itb Motor Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E010-0003-05 Bk Drum_ITB Motor error Detection Description There was no FG signal input from the startup of the Bk Drum_ITB Motor in the Main Drive Unit. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the Bk Drum/ITB Motor and the DC Controller PCB - Bk Drum Unit [0313-0000] - ITB Unit [0600-0000] - ITB Cleaning Blade...
Page 358: E012-0002-05: Cl Drum Motor Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E012-0002-05 CL Drum Motor error Detection Description The specified speed could not be maintained although it became the specified speed at least once from the startup of the CL Drum Motor in the Main Drive Unit. (The detection timing varies depending on the paper feed conditions.) Remedy [Related parts]...
Page 359: E013-0001-05: Waste Toner Feed Motor Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E013-0001-05 Waste Toner Feed Motor error Detection Description After rotation speed of the Waste Toner Feed Motor was detected when the motor was driven, it was detected that the speed was not at the specified speed. Remedy [Related parts] - Waste Toner Container - Waste Toner Feed Assembly - Waste Toner Drive Assembly...
Page 360: E014-0002-05: Fixing Motor Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E014-0002-05 Fixing Motor error Detection Description The specified speed could not be maintained although it became the specified speed at least once from the startup of the Fixing Motor. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN049/J123) and the Fixing Motor (M09) - Fixing Unit - Gears in the Fixing Unit - Cam/21T Gear...
Page 361: E020-01A8-05: Toner Density Sensor (Y) Output Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E020-01A8-05 Toner Density Sensor (Y) output error Detection Description The output value of the Toner Density Sensor (Y) in the Developing Unit (Y) did not fall within the range between 38 and 214 for 2 consecutive times during printing. Remedy [Related parts] - Developing Unit (Y)
Page 362: E020-01B8-05: Toner Density Sensor (Y) Output Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E020-01B8-05 Toner Density Sensor (Y) output error Detection Description The output value did not exceed Vtrgt_ind_int although the control voltage of the Toner Density Sensor (Y) in the Developing Unit (Y) was increased to 142 or higher, or it did not fall below Vtrgt_ ind_int although the voltage was decreased to 102 at initialization.
Page 363: E020-01C8-05: Error In Take-Up Of Sealing Member (Y)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E020-01C8-05 Error in take-up of Sealing Member (Y) Detection Description The patch output value (SigR) failed to be 900 or less during initialization of the Developing Unit (Y). Remedy [Related parts] - Developing Unit (Y) - Drum Unit (Y) - DC Controller PCB - Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB - Primary Transfer High-Voltage PCB...
Page 364: E020-02A8-05: Toner Density Sensor (M) Output Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E020-02A8-05 Toner Density Sensor (M) output error Detection Description The output value of the Toner Density Sensor (M) in the Developing Unit (M) did not fall within the range between 38 and 214 for 2 consecutive times during printing. Remedy [Related parts] - Developing Unit (M)
Page 365: E020-02B8-05: Toner Density Sensor (M) Output Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E020-02B8-05 Toner Density Sensor (M) output error Detection Description The output value did not exceed Vtrgt_ind_int although the control voltage of the Toner Density Sensor (M) in the Developing Unit (M) was increased to 142 or higher, or it did not fall below Vtrgt_ ind_int although the voltage was decreased to 102 at initialization.
Page 366: E020-02C8-05: Error In Take-Up Of Sealing Member (M)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E020-02C8-05 Error in take-up of Sealing Member (M) Detection Description The patch output value (SigR) failed to be 900 or less during initialization of the Developing Unit (M). Remedy [Related parts] - Developing Unit (M) - Drum Unit (M) - DC Controller PCB - Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB - Primary Transfer High-Voltage PCB...
Page 367: E020-03A8-05: Toner Density Sensor (C) Output Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E020-03A8-05 Toner Density Sensor (C) output error Detection Description The output value of the Toner Density Sensor (C) in the Developing Unit (C) did not fall within the range between 38 and 214 for 2 consecutive times during printing. Remedy [Related parts] - Developing Unit (C) [0322-0000]...
Page 368: E020-03B8-05: Toner Density Sensor (C) Output Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E020-03B8-05 Toner Density Sensor (C) output error Detection Description The output value did not exceed Vtrgt_ind_int although the control voltage of the Toner Density Sensor (C) in the Developing Unit (C) was increased to 142 or higher, or it did not fall below Vtrgt_ ind_int although the voltage was decreased to 102 at initialization.
Page 369: E020-03C8-05: Error In Take-Up Of Sealing Member (C)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E020-03C8-05 Error in take-up of Sealing Member (C) Detection Description The patch output value (SigR) failed to be 900 or less during initialization of the Developing Unit (C). Remedy [Related parts] - Developing Unit (C) [0322-0000] - Drum Unit (C) - DC Controller PCB - Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB - Primary Transfer High-Voltage PCB...
Page 370: E020-04A8-05: Toner Density Sensor (Bk) Output Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E020-04A8-05 Toner Density Sensor (Bk) output error Detection Description The output value of the Toner Density Sensor (Bk) in the Developing Unit (Bk) did not fall within the range between 38 and 214 for 2 consecutive times during printing. Remedy [Related parts] - Developing Unit (Bk)
Page 371: E020-04B8-05: Toner Density Sensor (Bk) Output Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E020-04B8-05 Toner Density Sensor (Bk) output error Detection Description The output value did not exceed Vtrgt_ind_int although the control voltage of the Toner Density Sensor (Bk) in the Developing Unit (Bk) was increased to 142 or higher, or it did not fall below Vtrgt_ind_int although the voltage was decreased to 102 at initialization.
Page 372: E020-04C8-05: Error In Take-Up Of Sealing Member (Bk)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E020-04C8-05 Error in take-up of Sealing Member (Bk) Detection Description The patch output value (SigR) failed to be 900 or less during initialization of the Developing Unit (Bk). Remedy [Related parts] - Developing Unit (Bk) - Drum Unit (Bk) - DC Controller PCB - Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB - Primary Transfer High-Voltage PCB...
Page 373: E021-0001-05: Developing Motor Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E021-0001-05 Developing Motor error Detection Description It did not become the specified speed although 0.8 sec have passed from the startup of the Developing Motor. Remedy [Related parts] - Main Drive Unit - Harness between the Developing Motor and the DC Controller PCB - Power Supply Unit - Developing Motor (M10) - DC Controller PCB...
Page 374: E021-0120-05 Developing Screw Rotation Detection Error (Y)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E021-0120-05 Developing Screw rotation detection error (Y) Detection Description The difference between the maximum and the minimum of sampling values detected by the Toner Density Sensor (Y) in the Developing Unit (Y) was 12 V or less during rotation of the Developing Screw.
Page 375: E021-0420-05 Developing Screw Rotation Detection Error (Bk)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E021-0420-05 Developing Screw rotation detection error (Bk) Detection Description The difference between the maximum and the minimum of sampling values detected by the Toner Density Sensor (Bk) in the Developing Unit (Bk) was 12 V or less during rotation of the Developing Screw.
Page 376: E025-0168-05: No Toner Detection Error (Y)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E025-0168-05 No toner detection error (Y) Detection Description - The state without toner was detected although the recovery sequence was performed for 5 times after replacement of the Toner Container (Y). * - The recovery sequence was repeated with no toner in the container. * In platform V3.6 and later, error caused by this event will not occur.
Page 377: E025-0220-05 Bottle Motor Error (M)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E025-0220-05 Bottle Motor error (M) Detection Description Rotation of bottle was detected while the Toner Bottle Motor (M) was OFF. Remedy [Related parts] R1.00 - Harness between the Bottle Motor (YM) (M04) and the DC Controller PCB (UN049/J127) - Harness between the Toner Supply Sensor (M) (PS27/J1060) and DC Controller PCB (UN049/ J127) - Toner Supply Sensor (M) (PS27)
Page 378: E025-0310-05 Bottle Motor Error (C)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E025-0310-05 Bottle Motor error (C) Detection Description The Toner Supply Sensor (C) did not detect change for 1.5 sec or longer while the Bottle Motor (CK) was rotated at toner supply. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the Bottle Motor (CK) and the DC Controller PCB - Harness between the Toner Supply Sensor (C) (PS28) and the DC Controller PCB - Toner Bottle (C) [1052-0000] - Toner Supply Sensor (C) (PS28)
Page 379: E025-0368-05: No Toner Detection Error (C)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E025-0368-05 No toner detection error (C) Detection Description - The state without toner was detected although the recovery sequence was performed for 5 times after replacement of the Toner Container (C). * - The recovery sequence was repeated with no toner in the container. * In platform V3.6 and later, error caused by this event will not occur.
Page 380: E025-0420-05 Bottle Motor Error (Bk)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E025-0420-05 Bottle Motor error (Bk) Detection Description Rotation of bottle was detected while the Toner Bottle Motor (Bk) was OFF. Remedy [Related parts] R1.00 - Harness between the Bottle Motor (CK) (M05) and the DC Controller PCB (UN049/J127) - Harness between the Toner Supply Sensor (Bk) (PS29/J1062) and the DC Controller PCB (UN049/J127) - Toner Supply Sensor (Bk) (PS29)
Page 381: E029-5008-05: Registration Patch Sensor (Front) Density Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E029-5008-05 Registration Patch Sensor (Front) density error Detection Description The background regular reflection output of the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Front) did not fall within the range from 115 to 1000 at initialization of the Developing Unit. Remedy [Related parts] - Power Supply Unit - DC Controller PCB...
Page 382: E029-7008-05 Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) Density Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E029-7008-05 Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) density error Detection Description The background regular reflection output of the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Rear) did not fall within the range from 115 to 1000 at initialization of the Developing Unit. Remedy [Related parts] - Power Supply Unit - DC Controller PCB...
Page 383: E064-1103-05 High Voltage Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E064-1103-05 High voltage error Detection Description Remedy [Related parts] - Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB - DC Controller PCB - Harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1.
Page 384: E064-1203-05 High Voltage Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E064-1203-05 High voltage error Detection Description Remedy [Related parts] - Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB - DC Controller PCB - Harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1.
Page 385: E064-1303-05 High Voltage Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E064-1303-05 High voltage error Detection Description Remedy [Related parts] - Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB - DC Controller PCB - Harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1.
Page 386: E064-1403-05 High Voltage Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E064-1403-05 High voltage error Detection Description Remedy [Related parts] - Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB - DC Controller PCB - Harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1.
Page 387: E074-0001-05: Itb Hp Time Out Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E074-0001-05 ITB HP time out error Detection Description The HP Sensor in the Main Drive Unit did not detect home position within the specified period of time. Remedy [Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB (UN049/J131) to the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sensor (PS33/J1189) - Harness from the DC Controller PCB (UN049/J131) to the Primary Transfer Disengagement Motor (M08/J1201)
Page 388: E074-0002-05: Itb Hp Time Out Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E074-0002-05 ITB HP time out error Detection Description There was no change after the HP Sensor in the Main Drive Unit detected home position. Remedy [Related parts] - Harnesses from the DC Controller PCB (UN049/J131) to the Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sensor (PS33/J1189) - Harness from the DC Controller PCB (UN049/J131) to the Primary Transfer Disengagement Motor (M08/J1201)
Page 389: E100-0001-05 Bd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E100-0001-05 BD error Detection Description The BD lock was unlocked although it had been locked once. Remedy [Related parts] - DC Controller PCB - Laser Scanner Unit - CABLE, FLAT, between the YM Laser Driver PCB (J203) and the CK Laser Driver PCB (J801) [Remedy] - Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
Page 390: E110-0004-05 Scanner Motor Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E110-0004-05 Scanner Motor error Detection Description Correction in timing of laser exposure to the Polygon Mirror was not detected after the phase lock by BD control. Remedy [Related parts] - Main Controller PCB - Laser Scanner Unit - CABLE, FLAT, between the YM Laser Driver PCB (J203) and the Main Controller PCB (J19) - CABLE, FLAT, between the YM Laser Driver PCB (J203) and the CK Laser Driver PCB (J801) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
Page 391: E196-000F-05 Communication Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E196-000F-05 Communication error Detection Description The number of read/write job data to the DCON EEPROM exceeded 100. Remedy [Related parts] - DC Controller PCB [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
Page 392: E196-0800-05 Communication Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E196-0800-05 Communication error Detection Description The NACK (a negative reply sent by the reception side to the sending side) was received 3 times in communication from the DC Controller PCB (CPU) to the HVT EEPROM. Remedy [Related parts] - Secondary Transfer High-Voltage PCB - DC Controller PCB [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
Page 393: E197-0B11-05 Serial Communication Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E197-0B11-05 Serial communication error Detection Description Communication between the DC Controller PCB and the Second/Third Delivery PCB was not completed. Remedy [Related parts] - 2nd/3rd Delivery Drive Unit [7500-0002] - DC Controller PCB [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1.
Page 394: E197-1002-05 Serial Communication Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E197-1002-05 Serial communication error Detection Description A communication error between the CPU of the DC Controller PCB and KONA2 (ASIC) in the DC Controller PCB was detected. Remedy [Related parts] - DC Controller PCB [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the DC Controller PCB, back up the service mode data and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
Page 395: E197-1084-05 Serial Communication Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E197-1084-05 Serial communication error Detection Description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Laser Driver PCB was detected. (An error caused by software) Remedy [Related parts] - Laser Scanner Unit - DC Controller PCB [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1.
Page 396: E199-0101-05 Error In High Voltage Sequence (Y)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E199-0101-05 Error in high voltage sequence (Y) Detection Description Error for collecting log. Remedy [Remedy] Collect debug log and contact to the sales company. [Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> SELF-CHK" to "1", it is handled as an error. E199-0102-05 Error in high voltage sequence (M) Detection Description...
Page 397: E202-0002-04 Reader Scanner Unit Hp Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E202-0002-04 Reader Scanner Unit HP error Detection Description The Reader Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when completing scanning operation. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Controller PCB (UN05/J7005) and the Scanner Unit HP Sensor (PS_ A1/J5002) - Harness between the Main Controller PCB (UN05/J7006) and the Scanner Motor (STM1/J5015) - Scanner Unit HP Sensor (PS_A1)
Page 398: E202-0101-04 Dadf Scanner Unit Hp Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E202-0101-04 DADF Scanner Unit HP error Detection Description The DADF Scanner Unit could not detect the home position when starting scanning operation. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1/J408) and the Glass Movement HP Sensor (PS_ A9/J462) - Glass Movement HP Sensor (PS_A9) [5200-0003 - Glass Movement Gear 18T...
Page 399: E240-0002-00 Controller Communication Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E240-0002-00 Controller communication error Detection Description An error in receiving data from the controller was detected. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN049/J110) and the Main Controller PCB (UN05/ J4511) - DC Controller PCB (UN049) - Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
Page 400: E240-0D00-00 Controller Communication Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E240-0D00-00 Controller communication error Detection Description A sequence error with the controller occurred. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN049/J110) and the Main Controller PCB (UN05/ J4511) - DC Controller PCB (UN049) - Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
Page 401: E248-0001-04 Eeprom Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E248-0001-04 EEPROM error Detection Description The Main Controller PCB detected reading error of the Reader backup value in the Reader Controller PCB. Remedy [Related parts] Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Check/replace the Main Controller PCB. [Reference] Before replacing the Main Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
Page 402: E248-0103-04 Eeprom Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E248-0103-04 EEPROM error Detection Description The DADF Driver PCB detected an error at inspection after completion of writing of the backup value. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the ADF Driver PCB and the Main Controller PCB (UN05) - ADF Driver PCB - Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
Page 403: E280-0002-04 Communication Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E280-0002-04 Communication error Detection Description Disconnection of FFC between the Reader Controller PCB and the Reader Scanner Unit was detected. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Scanner Unit (UN_BO2/J101) and the Main Controller PCB (UN05/ J7000) - Reader Scanner Unit (UN_BO2) - Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
Page 404: E302-0002-04 Error In Paper Front Black Shading
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E302-0002-04 Error in paper front black shading Detection Description An access error to the paper front black shading RAM or a paper front black shading value out of specification was detected. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Scanner Unit (UN_BO2/J101) and the Main Controller PCB (UN05/ J7000) - Reader Scanner Unit (UN_BO2) - Main Controller PCB...
Page 405: E302-0103-04 Error In Paper Back White Shading
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E302-0103-04 Error in paper back white shading Detection Description An access error to the paper back white shading RAM or a paper back white shading value that was higher than the specified value was detected. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the DADF Scanner Unit (J1102) and the Main Controller PCB (UN05) - DADF Scanner Unit - Main Controller PCB (UN05)
Page 406: E315-0500-00 Image Process Device Timeout Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E315-0500-00 Image process device timeout error Detection Description Transfer of image signal was not completed within the specified period of time at scanning. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the Reader Unit and the Main Controller PCB (UN05) - Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
Page 407: E315-0541-00 Image Process Device Timeout Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E315-0541-00 Image process device timeout error Detection Description Decompression of JPEG was not completed within the specified period of time. Remedy [Related parts] Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1.
Page 408: E355-0004-00 System Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E355-0004-00 System error Detection Description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company. E400-0001-04 Communication error Detection Description A communication error between the Main Controller PCB and the DADF Driver PCB was detected. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Controller PCB (UN05) and the ADF Driver PCB - ADF Driver PCB - Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
Page 409: E423-0001-04 Sdram Error In The Main Controller Pcb
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E423-0001-04 SDRAM error in the Main Controller PCB Detection Description Either an access error to SDRAM in the Main Controller PCB or an error at data inspection was detected. Remedy [Related parts] Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Replace the Main Controller PCB (UN05). [Reference] Before replacing the Main Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx.
Page 410: E490-9999-04 Error Due To The Reader For Different Model
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E490-9999-04 Error due to the reader for different model Detection Description Configuration mismatch between the Reader Controller software and the Reader/DADF was detected. Remedy Execute automatic software update. (Install the system software with correct configuration.) E500-0000-02 Communication error (Finisher-K1/Sorter-A1) Detection Description a.
Page 411: E503-0021-02 Error In Communication Between The Finisher And Saddle Unit (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E503-0021-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Saddle Unit (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB was detected. (Command transmission error) Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1 [Related parts] - Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Saddle Stitcher Controller - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) - Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB (PCB201) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
Page 412: E503-0032-02 Error In Communication Between The Finisher And Puncher Unit (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E503-0032-02 Error in communication between the Finisher and Puncher Unit (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description Communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Puncher Controller PCB was detected. (Command reception error) Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1 [Related parts] - Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Puncher Controller PCB - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) - Puncher Controller PCB (PCB301) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
Page 413: E503-0062-02 Error In Communication Between The Ic Of Finisher Controller Pcb (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E503-0062-02 Error in communication between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description Communication error between the IC of Finisher Controller PCB was detected. (Command reception error) Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1 [Related parts] - Finisher Controller PCB (PCB101) [Remedy] Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
Page 414: E514-8001-02: A. Assist Motor Error (Finisher-K1) B. Rear End Assist Guide Hp Error (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E514-8001-02 a. Assist Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Rear End Assist Guide HP error (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description a. The Assist HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Assist Motor operation started. b. The rear end assist guide does not come off the Rear End Assist Guide HP Sensor although the Rear End Assist Guide Motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
Page 415: E516-0002-02 Paddle Motor Error (Finisher-K1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E516-0002-02 Paddle Motor error (Finisher-K1) Detection Description - The Paper Fold HP Sensor was not turned ON although 3 seconds had passed after the Paddle Motor operation started. - The last paper fold operation is not finished when driving the Paddle Motor. Remedy INNER FIN-K1 [Related parts]...
Page 416: E530-8002-02: A. Rear Alignment Motor Error (Finisher-K1) B. Front Aligning Plate Hp Error (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E530-8002-02 a. Rear Alignment Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Front Aligning Plate HP error (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description a. The Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 seconds had passed after the Rear Alignment Motor operation started. b.
Page 417: E531-8002-02: A. Stapler Motor Error (Finisher-K1) B. Staple Hp Error (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E531-8002-02 a. Stapler Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Staple HP error (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description a. The Staple HP Sensor was not turned ON although 0.4 seconds had passed after the Stapler Motor operation started. b. The Staple HP Sensor does not detect the staple although the Staple Motor has been driven for 0.4 seconds.
Page 418: E532-8002-02: A. Stapler Shift Motor Error (Finisher-K1) B. Stapler Shift Hp Error (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E532-8002-02 a. Stapler Shift Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Stapler Shift HP error (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description a. The Stapler Shift HP Sensor was not turned ON although 10 seconds had passed after the Stapler Shift Motor operation started. b. The Stapler Shift HP Sensor does not detect the stapler unit although the Stapler Shift Motor has been driven for 20 seconds.
Page 419: E535-8001-02 Error In The Swing Guide Motor (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E535-8001-02 Error in the Swing Guide Motor (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description The swing guide does not come off the Swing Guide HP Sensor when the Swing Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second. Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1 [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Swing Guide Motor (M110) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Swing Guide HP Sensor (PS119)
Page 420: E537-8001-02: A. Front Alignment Motor Error (Finisher-K1) B. Rear Aligning Plate Hp Error (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E537-8001-02 a. Front Alignment Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Rear Aligning Plate HP error (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description a. The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Front Alignment Motor operation started. b.
Page 421: E540-8001-02: A. Tray Shift Motor Error (Finisher-K1) B. Tray 1 Timeout Error (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E540-8001-02 a. Tray Shift Motor error (Finisher-K1) b. Tray 1 timeout error (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description a. The Stack Tray Paper Height Sensor was not turned ON although 5 seconds had passed after the Tray Shift Motor operation started. b.
Page 422: E540-8004-02 Stack Tray Paper Surface Detection Error (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E540-8004-02 Stack tray paper surface detection error (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description The Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor does not turn off when the stack tray has been lowered for 10 seconds. Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1 [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-emitting) (PBA101) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Stack Tray Paper Surface Sensor (light-receiving) (PBA102/PBA103) to the Finisher Controller PCB...
Page 423: E551-0012-02 Error In The Buffer Pass Power Supply Cooling Fan (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E551-0012-02 Error in the Buffer Pass Power Supply Cooling Fan (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description The lock status is released when the fan stops. Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1 [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Buffer Pass Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM201) to the Buffer Pass Controller - Buffer Pass Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM201) - Buffer Pass Controller PCB (PCB201) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
Page 424: E553-8002-02: A. Error In The Escape Delivery Shift Motor (Finisher-Aa1) B. Error In The Sorter Shift Motor (Sorter-A1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E553-8002-02 a. Error in the Escape Delivery Shift Motor (Finisher-AA1) b. Error in the Sorter Shift Motor (Sorter-A1) Detection Description a. The Escape Delivery Roller HP Sensor does not detect the escape delivery roller when the Escape Delivery Shift Motor has been driven for 1 second. b.
Page 425: E553-8012-02 Error In The Flapper Motor (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E553-8012-02 Error in the Flapper Motor (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description The Flapper HP Sensor does not detect the flapper when the Flapper Motor has been driven for 1 second. Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1 [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Flapper HP Sensor (PS105) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Flapper Motor (M104) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Flapper HP Sensor (PS105) - Flapper Motor (M104)
Page 426: E554-8001-02 Safety Switch On Error (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E554-8001-02 Safety switch ON error (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description The Swing Guide Safety Switch is turned ON for 0.3 seconds. The Front Cover Switch is turned OFF for 0.3 seconds when the Front Cover Sensor is ON. Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1 [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Swing Guide Safety Switch (SW102) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Stack Tray Shift Motor (M105) to the Finisher Controller PCB...
Page 427: E577-8002-02 Error In The Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E577-8002-02 Error in the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description The Paddle HP Sensor does not detect the paddle when the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor has been driven for 1 second. Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1 [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Paddle HP Sensor (PS120) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103) to the Finisher Controller PCB - Paddle HP Sensor (PS120) - Stack Delivery/Paddle Motor (M103)
Page 428: E57B-8001-02 Error In The Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E57B-8001-02 Error in the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description The paper end pushing guide does not come off the Paper End Pushing Guide HP Sensor when the Paper End Pushing Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second. Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1 [Related parts]...
Page 429: E583-8002-02 Error In The Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E583-8002-02 Error in the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description The Front/Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensors don't detect the tray auxiliary guides when the Tray Auxiliary Guide Motor has been driven for 1 second. Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1 [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Front Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS117) to the Finisher Controller - Harnesses from the Rear Tray Auxiliary Guide HP Sensor (PS118) to the Finisher Controller PCB...
Page 430: E590-8002-02 Error In The Punch Motor (Puncher Unit-A1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E590-8002-02 Error in the Punch Motor (Puncher Unit-A1) Detection Description The Punch HP Sensor does not detect the punch during initialization. The Punch HP Sensor does not detect the punch when the Punch Motor has been driven for 0.4 seconds for returning the punch after the punch jam.
Page 431: E5F0-8001-02 Error In The Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E5F0-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description The saddle paper end stopper does not come off the Saddle Paper End Stopper HP Sensor when the Saddle Paper End Stopper Motor has been driven for 1 second. Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1 [Related parts]...
Page 432: E5F1-8003-02: Saddle Delivery Motor Clock Error (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E5F1-8003-02 Saddle Delivery Motor clock error (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description The lock state of Saddle Delivery Motor is detected 0.2 seconds or more while the motor operates. Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1 [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Delivery Motor Clock Sensor (PS211) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Delivery Motor (M207) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Delivery Motor Clock Sensor (PS211)
Page 433: E5F4-8001-02: Error In The Saddle Stitcher Motor (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E5F4-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Stitcher Motor (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description The saddle stitcher does not come off the Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor when the Saddle Stitcher Motor has been driven for 1.2 seconds. Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1 [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Stitcher Motor (M208) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Stitcher HP Sensor (PS215)
Page 434: E5F6-8002-02: Error In The Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E5F6-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description The Saddle Paper Pushing Plate HP Sensor does not detect the saddle paper pushing plate when the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate/Folding Motor has been driven for 3 seconds. Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1 [Related parts]...
Page 435: E5F8-8001-02 Error In The Saddle Switching Lever Motor (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E5F8-8001-02 Error in the Saddle Switching Lever Motor (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description The saddle switching lever does not come off the Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor when the Saddle Switching Lever Motor has been driven for 1 second. Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1 [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Switching Lever HP Sensor (PS205) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller...
Page 436: E5Fa-8002-02: Error In The Saddle Gripper Motor (Finisher-Aa1)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E5FA-8002-02 Error in the Saddle Gripper Motor (Finisher-AA1) Detection Description The Saddle Gripper HP Sensor does not detect the saddle gripper when the Saddle Gripper Motor has been driven for 1 second. Remedy STAPLE FIN-AA1/BOOKLET FIN-AA1 [Related parts] - Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Harnesses from the Saddle Gripper Motor (M205) to the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB - Saddle Gripper HP Sensor (PS209)
Page 437: E602-0101-00: Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0101-00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the PDL-related file storage area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 438: E602-0201-00 Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0201-00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 439: E602-0301-00: Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0301-00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the MEAP-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 440: E602-0401-00 Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0401-00 HDD error Detection Description Logical partition error was detected. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Controller PCB (UN05) and the HDD...
Page 441: E602-0501-00: Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0501-00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 442: E602-0601-00: Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0601-00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 443: E602-0701-00: Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0701-00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in general application temporary area (temporary file). (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 444: E602-0801-00: Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0801-00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the general application-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 445: E602-0901-00 Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-0901-00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in PDL spool data (temporary file). (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 446: E602-1001-00: Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-1001-00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the SEND-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 447: E602-1101-00: Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-1101-00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the update-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 448: E602-1201-00 Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-1201-00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the license-related area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 449: E602-1301-00: Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-1301-00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the system area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 450: E602-1401-00 Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-1401-00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in SWAP (temporary file/alternative memory area). (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 451: E602-1701-00: Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-1701-00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the debug log area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 452: E602-1801-00 Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-1801-00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the image data storage area in Advanced Box. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 453: E602-1901-00 Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-1901-00 HDD error Detection Description An error was detected in the storage area of data for printing. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 454: E602-2000-00 Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-2000-00 HDD error Detection Description I/O error was detected in the file system after startup. Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1. Check that the HDD optional board is properly installed. 2.
Page 455: E602-Ff01-00 Hdd Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E602-FF01-00 HDD error Detection Description An unidentified HDD error was detected at startup. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the Main Controller PCB (UN05) and the HDD - HDD - Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
Page 456: E613-0512-00 Faulty/Insufficient Image Memory
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E613-0512-00 Faulty/insufficient image memory Detection Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB Remedy [Related parts] Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Check/replace the Main Controller PCB. [Reference] Before replacing the Main Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
Page 457: E614-0002-00 Flash Pcb Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-0002-00 Flash PCB error Detection Description The file system could not be initialized normally at startup. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. Remedy [Related parts] - Flash PCB - Main Controller PCB (UN05)
Page 458: E614-0073-00 System Verification Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-0073-00 System verification error Detection Description At startup in safe mode, an error may occur due to invalid data of the startup firmware. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it is not recorded in the error log.
Page 459: E614-0201-00 Flash Pcb Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-0201-00 Flash PCB error Detection Description An error was detected in the system area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 460: E614-0301-00 Flash Pcb Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-0301-00 Flash PCB error Detection Description An error was detected in the system area. (Initialization failed at startup or I/O error at startup) When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log.
Page 461: E614-0411-00 Flash Pcb Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-0411-00 Flash PCB error Detection Description Logical partition error was detected. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O error after startup) Remedy [Related parts] - Flash PCB - Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
Page 462: E614-0511-00: Flash Pcb Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-0511-00 Flash PCB error Detection Description An error was detected in the general application-related area. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O error after startup) Remedy [Related parts] - Flash PCB - Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
Page 463: E614-0611-00: Flash Pcb Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-0611-00 Flash PCB error Detection Description An error was detected in the license-related area. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O error after startup) Remedy [Related parts] - Flash PCB - Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
Page 464: E614-0711-00: Flash Pcb Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-0711-00 Flash PCB error Detection Description An error was detected in system setting value (service mode, etc.) storage area. (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O error after startup) Remedy [Related parts] - Flash PCB - Main Controller PCB (UN05) [7000-0001] [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
Page 465: E614-4001-00 Flash Pcb Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-4001-00 Flash PCB error Detection Description The OS boot file was not found. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. Remedy [Related parts] Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared.
Page 466: E614-4010-00: Flash Pcb Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-4010-00 Flash PCB error Detection Description The OS in safe mode could not be recognized. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1.
Page 467: E614-9003-00: Flash Pcb Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-9003-00 Flash PCB error Detection Description Parameter error was detected at startup. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it may not be recorded in the error log. Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. 1.
Page 468: E614-Ff11-00 Flash Pcb Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E614-FF11-00 Flash PCB error Detection Description Flash error (Unidentified) (File could not be written in the Flash PCB after startup or I/O error after startup) Remedy [Related parts] - Flash PCB - Main Controller PCB (UN05) [7000-0001] [Remedy] Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared. Although the error is cleared by "HD-CHECK", it may occur again.
Page 469: E713-0010-05: Communication Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E713-0010-05 Communication error Detection Description Timeout was detected in communication between the host machine and the finisher. Remedy [Related parts] R1.00 a. STAPLE/BOOKLET FINISHER-AA1 - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN049/J182) and the Finisher Controller PCB - Harness between the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB (UN01/J306) and the Relay Path Unit (J1186) - DC Controller PCB (UN049) - Relay Path Unit...
Page 470: E713-0020-05: Communication Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E713-0020-05 Communication error Detection Description Invalid BCC in received data was detected in communication between the host machine and the finisher. Remedy [Related parts] R1.00 a. STAPLE/BOOKLET FINISHER-AA1 - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN049/J182) and the Finisher Controller PCB - Harness between the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB (UN01/J306) and the Relay Path Unit (J1186) - DC Controller PCB (UN049)
Page 471: E713-0022-05: Communication Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E713-0022-05 Communication error Detection Description An undefined error was detected in communication with the finisher. Remedy [Related parts] R1.00 a. STAPLE/BOOKLET FINISHER-AA1 - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (UN049/J182) and the Finisher Controller PCB - Harness between the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB (UN01/J306) and the Relay Path Unit (J1186) - DC Controller PCB (UN049) - Relay Path Unit...
Page 472: E719-0001-00 Error In Coin Vendor
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E719-0001-00 Error in Coin Vendor. Detection Description Error in starting of the CoinVendor - The Coin Vendor, which should have been connected before the power was turned OFF, is not connected when the power is turned ON. Remedy Check the connection between charging management equipment and machine, and check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
Page 473: E719-0042-00 Coin Vendor Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E719-0042-00 Coin vendor error Detection Description Communication with the coin vendor could not be established at startup of the host machine. (Charge mode (COIN = 6) has been set.) Remedy 1. If it operates in charge mode (COIN = 6) - Check that it is the supported charging management equipment.
Page 474: E732-0020-00 Communication Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E732-0020-00 Communication error Detection Description A communication error of the Main Controller PCB was detected. Remedy [Related parts] Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Main Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
Page 475: E732-0F23-04 Communication Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E732-0F23-04 Communication error Detection Description Communication error that can be recovered by reboot If it is detected again immediately after reboot, E732-0023 is generated. Remedy It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after log collection.
Page 476: E733-0F00-05 Printer Communication Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E733-0F00-05 Printer communication error Detection Description Communication error that can be recovered by reboot If it is detected again immediately after reboot, E733-0000 is generated. Remedy It is not necessary to perform a remedy because the machine is automatically rebooted after log collection.
Page 477: E744-0003-00 Language File Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E744-0003-00 Language file error Detection Description The language file to be switched to that was described in the Config.txt in HDD was not found. Remedy Reinstall the correct language file using SST or USB flash drive reinstall the entire software. E744-0004-00 Language file error Detection Description...
Page 478: E746-0031-00 Tpm Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E746-0031-00 TPM error Detection Description A communication error has occurred between the Main Controller PCB and the TPM PCB at startup. Remedy Check/replace the TPM PCB. [Reference] After replacing the TPM PCB, if the TPM key was backed up, restore the key. 1.
Page 479: E748-2000-00 Main Controller Pcb Access Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E748-2000-00 Main Controller PCB access error Detection Description Main Controller PCB Chip access error. Remedy [Related parts] Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Check/replace the Main Controller PCB. [Reference] Before replacing the Main Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
Page 480: E748-2023-00 Main Controller Pcb Access Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E748-2023-00 Main Controller PCB access error Detection Description Main controller board access errors Remedy [Related parts] Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Check/replace the Main Controller PCB. [Reference] Before replacing the Main Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
Page 481: E748-7021-00 Start System Verification Function Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E748-7021-00 Start system verification function error Detection Description At startup, an error may occur due to invalid data of the OS kernel on the flash PCB. When this error occurs, the system has not been started normally. Therefore, it is not recorded in the error log.
Page 482: E806-0100-05 Front Fan Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E806-0100-05 Front Fan error Detection Description Unlocked state was detected 2 consecutive times in 3 sec when the Front Fan was driven. Remedy [Related parts] - Power Supply Unit - DC Controller PCB (UN049/J133) - Harnesses connecting the DC Controller PCB (J133), the Relay Connector (J1177), and the Front Fan (J1260) - Front Fan (FM01) [Remedy]...
Page 483: E808-0001-05 Zero Cross Signal Detection Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E808-0001-05 Zero cross signal detection error Detection Description After the start of the zero cross signal detection, the frequency between 43 Hz and 67 Hz could not be detected for 0.5 consecutive sec. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the DC Controller PCB (J115) and the AC Driver PCB (J322) - Power Supply Unit - DC Controller PCB [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
Page 484: E880-0003-00 Controller Fan Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E880-0003-00 Controller Fan error Detection Description It was detected that the Controller Fan was locked. Remedy [Related parts] - Main Controller Cooling Fan - Main Controller PCB (UN05) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts. [Reference] Before replacing the Main Controller PCB, back up the service mode data (approx. 2 min) and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected.
Page 485: E890-0002-05 Temperature Detection Error
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E890-0002-05 Temperature detection error Detection Description The thermistor in the Laser Scanner Unit consecutively detected a temperature outside of the specified range. Remedy [Related parts] - DC Controller PCB - Laser Scanner Unit - Harness connecting the YM Laser Driver PCB (J204) and the Thermistor in the Laser Scanner Unit (TH04) [Remedy] Check/replace the related harness/cable, connector and parts.
Page 486: E996-0Ca3-05 Error For Collecting Sequence Jam Log (Printer)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E996-0CA3-05 Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer) Detection Description Error for collecting jam log (Printer) Continuous 0CA3 jam was detected. Remedy [Remedy] Collect debug log and contact to the sales company. [Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D" to "1", it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence.
Page 487: E996-0Cac-05 Error For Collecting Sequence Jam Log (Printer)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm E996-0CAC-05 Error for collecting sequence jam log (Printer) Detection Description Error for collecting jam log (Printer) Continuous 0CF5 jam was detected. Remedy [Remedy] Collect debug log and contact to the sales company. [Reference] By setting "COPIER (LEVEL2)> OPTION> FNC-SW> JM-ERR-D" to "1", it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence.
Page 488: Error Code (Fax)
7. Error/Jam/Alarm Error Code (FAX) How to View Fax Error Codes When the service mode #1 SSSW SW01 Bit0 is set to "1" after installing the Fax Board, service error code is output on the communication management report, reception result report, and error transmission report in the event that the communication is resulted in an error.
Page 489 7. Error/Jam/Alarm No.*1 No.*2 Description ##114 ##3114 at time of reception, RTN is transmitted. ##116 ##3116 [T/R] Disconnection of loop current was detected during communication. ##200 ##3200 at time of reception, no image carrier is detected for 5 sec. ##201 ##3201 [T/R] DCN is received outside the normal parity procedure.
Page 490 7. Error/Jam/Alarm No.*1 No.*2 Description ##755 ##3755 at time of ECM transmission, no meaningful signal is received after transmission of PPS-MPS, causing the procedural signal to be transmitted more than specified. ##757 ##3757 at time of ECM transmission, DCN is received after retransmission of PPS-MPS. ##758 ##3758 at time of ECM transmission, the procedural signal has been transmitted more than...
Page 491: Alarm Code
7. Error/Jam/Alarm Alarm Code Alarm Code Details 00-0085 A notice of stat A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 00-0246 Error code display (4-digit) A. Operation / B. Cause / Soft counter PCB cannot write normally. C. Remedy 00-0247 Error code display (4-digit) A.
Page 492 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 04-0001 Cassette 1 Lifter error A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: C. Remedy Error in the Lifter Motor or the Lifter Sensor. Message displayed on the Control Panel: Paper source needs to be checked. (Call service rep.) Measures: 1.
Page 493 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 04-0003 Cassette 3 Lifter error A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: C. Remedy Error in the Lifter Motor or the Lifter Sensor. Message displayed on the Control Panel: Paper source needs to be checked. (Call service rep.) Measures: While the Cassette 3 is removed, turn ON the power and then insert the Cassette 3, and check the operation sound of the motor.
Page 494 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 04-0007 MP Tray Lifter error A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: C. Remedy Error in the Pullout Motor or the HP Sensor. Message displayed on the Control Panel: Paper source needs to be checked. (Call service rep.) Measures: Operate the Pullout Motor in the direction of the Multi-purpose Tray feed direction, and check the operation sound of the motor.
Page 495 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 09-0010 Drum memory detection error (Y) A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: The memory of the Drum Unit (Y) could not be detected. C. Remedy Measures: 1. Remove and then install the Drum Unit (Y). 2. Check the contact point of the Drum Unit New/Old PCB (Y) (UN35). 3.
Page 496 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 10-0006 Patch Sensor error 1 A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Soiled Patch Sensor window, shutter failure, or Patch Sensor failure C. Remedy [Related parts] - Harness between the Registration Patch Sensor and the DC Controller PCB - Registration Patch Sensor Unit - DC Controller PCB [Measures]...
Page 497 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 10-0092 Toner memory detection alarm (M) A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: Memory of toner (M) could not be detected. C. Remedy 1. Remove and then install the Toner Bottle (M). 2. Clean the Bottle New/Old Sensor (M) (UN40). 3.
Page 498 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 11-0010 Waste Toner Container preparation warning display A. Operation / B. Cause / Operation; A message is displayed on the Control Panel (printing is still possible) C. Remedy Cause: The following two conditions were met. - Waste Toner Full Level Sensor Detection - The threshold number of days left as set in COPIER >...
Page 499 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 13-002A For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 13-002B For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 13-0051 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 13-00FE For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C.
Page 500 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 29-0201 Drum (M) pre-exposure alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / An error in pre-exposure of the drum (M) was detected. C. Remedy Detection condition/timing: Warm-up rotation Detection condition: When the difference in detection value is within the specified value when the pre-exposure light intensity is changed Remedy: 1.
Page 501 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 30-0026 A voltage value below the threshold value was detected with primary transfer ATVC control for magenta A. Operation / B. Cause / Remedy: C. Remedy 1. Check the harness between the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB and the DC Controller PCB (open circuit, caught cable, connector disconnection).
Page 502 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 30-0137 The value of data for correcting high voltage output value was not within the range. A. Operation / B. Cause / Movement/symptom: C. Remedy Operation was performed with output control using the default table without correction of the high voltage output value.
Page 503 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 31-0106 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 31-0116 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 31-0126 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 31-0136 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C.
Page 504 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 34-0036 The correction value (C) of the write start position in the horizontal scanning direction exceeded the upper limit during color fine adjustment A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 34-0044 The correction value (Bk) of the write start position in the vertical scanning direction exceeded the upper limit during color fine adjustment A.
Page 505 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 34-5001 The value of the color displacement patch exceeded the upper limit (front side) A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: The value of the color displacement patch on the front side exceeded the upper limit. C. Remedy 1.
Page 506 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 38-0108 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Data Backup Service Application Error (Communication error with CBIO backup service (DCFS)), C. Remedy Error message (E-code: EBC0001) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 38-0109 Application-generated alarm A.
Page 507 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 38-0118 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Data Backup Service Application Error (Communication error of the Access Token Provider that C. Remedy name solution was not possible), Error message (E-code: EAC0007) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 38-0119 Application-generated alarm A.
Page 508 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-0231 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Cassette 1 * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-0232 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C.
Page 509 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-0251 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Frequently * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-0252 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C.
Page 510 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-0314 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Cyan * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-0320 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C.
Page 511 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-0341 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Black * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-0342 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C.
Page 512 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-0363 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Magenta * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-0364 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C.
Page 513 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-0390 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Image failure_Others * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-0511 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C.
Page 514 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-0552 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Options * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-0590 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C.
Page 515 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-0813 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Order_Toner_Magenta * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-0814 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C.
Page 516 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-1230 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Paper jam_Cassette_Not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-1231 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C.
Page 517 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-1250 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Paper jam_Outlet_Not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-1251 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C.
Page 518 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-1313 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Magenta_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-1314 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C.
Page 519 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-1340 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Image failure_Lines_Color not specified_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-1341 Application-generated alarm A.
Page 520 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-1362 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Yellow_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-1363 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C.
Page 521 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-1384 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Cyan_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-1390 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C.
Page 522 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-1551 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Operation failure_Abnormal noise_Main_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-1552 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C.
Page 523 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-1812 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Order_Toner_Yellow_(Cancel) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-1813 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C.
Page 524 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-2221 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Paper jam_Document Feeder_Frequently_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-2222 Application-generated alarm A.
Page 525 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-2244 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Paper jam_Multi-purpose Tray_Label paper_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-2245 Application-generated alarm A.
Page 526 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-2311 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Image failure_Displacement_Black_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-2312 Application-generated alarm A.
Page 527 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-2333 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Image failure_Soiling_Magenta_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-2334 Application-generated alarm A.
Page 528 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-2360 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Image failure_Hue_Color not specified_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-2361 Application-generated alarm A.
Page 529 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-2382 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Image failure_Color displacement_Yellow_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-2383 Application-generated alarm A.
Page 530 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-2532 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Operation failure_Control Panel_Occasional freeze-up (Not work)_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-2541 Application-generated alarm A.
Page 531 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 39-2690 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C. Remedy Settings_Others_(Customer information change) * This alarm is not displayed on LUI due to the alarm being generated by the application. 39-2811 Application-generated alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Service call application C.
Page 532 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 40-0120 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 40-0121 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 40-0122 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 40-0123 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C.
Page 533 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 43-0121 Developing Assembly (M) replacement completion alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Developing Assembly (M) counter was cleared. C. Remedy 43-0122 Developing Assembly (C) replacement completion alarm A. Operation / B. Cause / Developing Assembly (C) counter was cleared. C.
Page 534 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 70-0087 Firmware combination mismatch A. Operation / B. Cause / Cause: An option with the firmware which version is newer than that of the firmware installed in C. Remedy the host machine was detected. It is an alarm when the automatic update cancellation message is displayed on the Control Panel.
Page 535 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 76-0007 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 77-0001 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 77-0002 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 77-0003 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C.
Page 536 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 80-0003 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 80-0004 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 80-0007 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 80-0008 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C.
Page 537 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 81-0006 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 81-0007 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 83-0005 CanonPDF A. Operation / B. Cause / PDF memory full C. Remedy 83-0015 CanonPDF A. Operation / B. Cause / PDF data decode error C.
Page 538 7. Error/Jam/Alarm 84-0008 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 84-0009 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 85-0001 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C. Remedy 85-0002 For R&D A. Operation / B. Cause / C.
Page 539: Jam Code
7. Error/Jam/Alarm Jam Code Jam Type Type Overview of detection Check items (in arbitrary order) DELAY A delay jam occurs when a sensor was not turned • Remaining paper at the upstream of the target sensor ON although a specified period of time had passed •...
Page 540: Jam Screen Display Specification
7. Error/Jam/Alarm Jam screen display specification Due to one jam code being used for multiple options, the illustration for the different option may be displayed on the jam screen. In this case, "1/2" or similar information is displayed on top left side of the screen and this area can be pushed. This operation can be used to switch information on the screen.
Page 541 7. Error/Jam/Alarm ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID 0207 STNRY First Delivery Sensor PS14 0208 STNRY Second Delivery/Reverse Sensor PS51 0209 STNRY Third Delivery Sensor PS52 020A STNRY Duplex Reverce Sensor PS12 020B STNRY Pre-Registration Sensor PS22 0706 WRAP Fixing Outlet Sensor...
Page 542: Single Pass Dadf-B1
7. Error/Jam/Alarm Single Pass DADF-B1 PS_R3 PS_N1 PS_A3 PS_A5 PS_A4 PS_R1 UN_BO8 UN_BO7 PS_A9 PS_R2 PS_A1 PS_A6 PS_A2 PS_A7 UN_BO6 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID 0001 DELAY Post-separation Sensor PS_R1 0002 STNRY Post-separation Sensor PS_R1 0003 DELAY Arch Sensor PS_A1...
Page 543: Dadf-Av1
7. Error/Jam/Alarm ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID 0076 OTHER Large/Small Sensor, LTR- PS_R3, PS_A3 R/LGL Sensor 0090 ADF OPEN Copyboard Cover Open/ Reader : PS_N1, PS_N2 Closed Sensor (Front/Rear) 0091 ADF OPEN Copyboard Cover Open/ Reader : PS_N1, PS_N2 Closed Sensor (Front/Rear) 0092 COVER OP...
Page 544: Cassette Feeding Unit-Ap1
7. Error/Jam/Alarm ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name/Description Sensor ID 0050 STNRY Lead Sensor 0053 DELAY Delivery Reversal Sensor 0054 STNRY Delivery Reversal Sensor 0060 DOUBLE 0062 OTHER 0063 OTHER 0061 OTHER 0071 OTHER 0076 OTHER 0090 ADF OPEN 0091 ADF OPEN 0092...
Page 545: Inner Finisher-K1
7. Error/Jam/Alarm ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID 0A04 POWER ON Cassette 4 Vertical Path Sensor PS106 Inner Finisher-K1 MSW1 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID 1001 DELAY Delivery sensor 1101 STNRY Delivery sensor 1200 OTHER Timing error...
Page 546: Booklet Finisher-Aa1
7. Error/Jam/Alarm Booklet Finisher-AA1 PS111 PS102 PS101 PS130 PS103 PS114 PS104 PS128 SW101 PS129 PS125 PS201 PS203 PS215 PS202 PS303 PS304 PS301 ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID 1001 DELAY Inlet sensor PS101...
Page 547 7. Error/Jam/Alarm ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID 1002 DELAY Delivery Sensor PS102 1003 DELAY Buffer Sensor PS103 1004 DELAY Escape Delivery Sensor PS111 1008 DELAY Saddle Delivery Sensor PS203 1009 DELAY Saddle Inlet Sensor PS201 100A DELAY Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PI201...
Page 548: 2/3 Hole Puncher Unit-A1, 2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1, 4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1
7. Error/Jam/Alarm ACC ID Jam Code Type Sensor Name Sensor ID 1F01 OTHER Paper feed cancel jam 1F32 OTHER Manual stack insertion jam 1F3E ERROR Buffer pass Sequence error jam 1F90 OTHER Time out jam 2/3 Hole Puncher Unit-A1, 2/4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1, 4 Hole Puncher Unit-A1 PS303 PS304...
Page 549: Service Mode
Service Mode Overview........... 528 COPIER (Service mode for printer) ............545 FEEDER (ADF service mode)...928 SORTER (Service mode for delivery options)..........934 BOARD (Option board setting mode) ............957 FAX (Serivce Mode for FAX).....958...
Page 550: Overview
8. Service Mode Overview It is possible to see each item of service mode so that those who access to service mode can understand how to use them. The main types of this machine's service mode are shown below. Basic Operations This section describes the basic operation of service mode.
Page 551 8. Service Mode CAUTION: • Displayed language of the service mode contents can be selected from J/E/F/I/G/S/C/K/T. • The service mode contents can be upgraded using SST or a USB flash drive just like other system software. Example: COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION screen 1.
Page 552 8. Service Mode By pressing <LEVEL 1> at the upper right of the screen while Level 1 screen is displayed, the screen is switched to Level 2 screen. NOTE: This key combination can be used to enter the Level 2 screen. •...
Page 553: Situation Mode
8. Service Mode SITUATION Mode Situation mode has been implemented in this machine to improve workability and searchability at the site. This mode makes it possible to easily use the service mode appropriate for the scene at the site. The following items are available in situation mode. •...
Page 554 8. Service Mode 2. Select "SITUATION". 3. On the "SITUATION MODE" screen, select "Sensor Check". 4. Press a button according to the type of electrical component and the corresponding device type. Example: In the case of the Registration Sensor of the host machine, press the button (red dotted frame) at "COPIER"/"P- SENSOR".
Page 555 8. Service Mode 5. A list of electrical component types for the selected device is displayed. 6. Select an electrical component to display the details in the frame (red dotted frame) at the bottom of the screen. 7. Press the [i] button to display the screen showing the locations of electrical components. ■...
Page 556 8. Service Mode NOTE: The service mode used below utilizes the system where electrical components used are operated by control signals sent from the DC Controller. If a control signal is sent but the electrical component does not operate, a failure of the electrical component, open circuit of the cable for transmitting control signals, or poor contact of the connector is suspected.
Page 557 8. Service Mode 5. "ACTIVE" is displayed while the electrical component is driven. After the electrical component has been driven for a specified period of time, "OK!" is displayed if transmission of the drive signal succeeded, or "NG !" is displayed if failed.
Page 558: Security Support
8. Service Mode Press the [i] button to display the screen showing the locations of electrical components. 6. The screen showing the locations of electrical components is displayed. Security Support A password can be specified to prevent unauthorized access to the service mode. Related Service Mode: Setting password type when the screen is switched to the service mode •...
Page 559 8. Service Mode ■ Procedure for Setting Password 1. Set "1" or "2" in the following service mode. • COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSWD-SW <Setting range> 0: No password [Default] 1: Service technician 2: System administrator + Service technician CAUTION: •...
Page 560 Remote Operation Viewer in order to prevent the user from performing unexpected operations. As shown in the figure below, the mask screen is displayed when this function is enabled. Canon Remote Operation Viewer screen Operation Panel...
Page 561 8. Service Mode • When this function is enabled, a mask screen is displayed on the Control Panel. When the function is disabled, the original screen is displayed again. Example of the displayed mask screen • This function is disabled when the following operations are performed. •...
Page 562: Position To Affix The Service Label
8. Service Mode • Exit the Remote Operation Viewer. • Disconnect the network (disconnect the network cable, disable the network function, etc.). • Shut down or restart the machine. Position to Affix the Service Label Adjustment is made to every machine at the time of shipment and the adjustment value is written down in the service label. When replacing the DC Controller PCB or clearing RAM, the adjusted values of ADJUST and OPTION return to the default;...
Page 563 8. Service Mode NOTE: • Service print data cannot be output when an error has occurred. • When connecting a USB flash drive that runs on external power, start the machine with the power is turned ON in advance. A USB flash drive connected after the machine has been started cannot be recognized. How to obtain the report data Location “Moving the file in service mode”...
Page 564 8. Service Mode 3. Connect the USB flash drive storage device to the USB port. 4. Select service mode > Copier > Function > MISC-P > RPT2USB; and then press OK. NOTE: • If the downloaded file is opened as plain text, the paragraphs are misaligned, which makes it difficult to read the data. •...
Page 565 8. Service Mode 3. Execute Download mode > [5]: Download File > [4]: ServicePrint Download. ■ How to Export Service Print File to a PC Using SST The procedure for exporting the service print file to a PC using SST will now be described. (SST described in the procedure is Ver 4.72.) 1.
Page 566 8. Service Mode 3. Click the [Upload Data] button. iA4245 iA4245 iA4245 4. Select [Report] and click the [Start] button. iA4245 5. Specify the folder name to be saved and enter comments if necessary. Then click the [Store] button. iA4245 6.
Page 567: Copier (Service Mode For Printer)
8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) DISPLAY (State display mode) ■ VERSION COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION DC-CON Display of DCON firmware version Detail To display the firmware version of DC Controller PCB. Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 568 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION OP-CON Display of Option Controller PCB ROM ver Detail To display the ROM version of Option Controller PCB. Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99...
Page 569 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION LANG-ES Display of Spanish language file version Detail To display the version of Spanish language file. Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99 LANG-ET...
Page 570 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION LANG-RU Display of Russian language file version Detail To display the version of Russian language file. Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99 LANG-SL...
Page 571 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION LANG-RM Display of Romanian language file ver Detail To display the version of Romanian language file. Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99 LANG-SK...
Page 572 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION MEDIA-ZH Dspl of Chinese media info ver: smpl Detail To display the version of Chinese media information (simplified). Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99...
Page 573 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION MEDIA-KO Dspl of Korean media information version Detail To display the version of Korean media information. Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99 MEDIA-NL...
Page 574 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION MEDIA-BU Dspl of Bulgarian media information ver Detail To display the version of Bulgarian media information. Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99 MEDIA-CR...
Page 575 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION S-LNG-EN Dspl of service mode English file ver Detail To display the version of English language file in service mode. Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range...
Page 576 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION Display of self diagnosis tool version Detail To display the version of self diagnosis tool. Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99 LANG-TH...
Page 577 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION RPTL-DA Dspl RUI Portal Danish file version Detail To display the version of Danish language file for "Remote UI: Portal". Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range...
Page 578 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION RPTL-RU Dspl RUI Portal Russian file version Detail To display the version of Russian language file for "Remote UI: Portal". Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range...
Page 579 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION RPTL-CA Dspl RUI Portal Catalan file version Detail To display the version of Catalan language file for "Remote UI: Portal". Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range...
Page 580 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > VERSION LANG-LV Display of Latvian language file version Detail To display the version of Latvian language file. Use Case When upgrading the firmware Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 00.01 to 99.99 ■...
Page 581 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ACC-STS SORTER Connect state of Finisher-related option Detail To display the connection state of Finisher-related options. Use Case When checking the connection of Finisher-related options Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range Left column (connection state of Finisher-related options): 1 to 5...
Page 582 8. Service Mode ■ ANALOG COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ANALOG TEMP Display of outside temperature Detail To display the temperature outside the machine. This is measured by the Environment Sensor that detects the outside air. Use Case When checking the temperature outside the machine Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 583 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > ANALOG FIX-E2 Dspl Fixing Heater front edg temperature Detail To display the front edge temperature of the Fixing Heater detected by the Sub Thermistor 1. Use Case When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Heater Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only)
Page 584 8. Service Mode ■ HV-STS COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > HV-STS 1ATVC-Y Dspl Y-clr prmry trns ATVC base voltage Detail To display the base voltage Vb derived from primary transfer ATVC control (1/1 speed) for Y-color. As Vb is closer to 3500, the Primary Transfer Roller is closer to the end of life, so image failure (leopard pattern image or mottled image due to poor transfer) is likely to occur.
Page 585 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > HV-STS 2ATVC Dspl secondary transfer ATVC tgt current Detail To display the decuple value of the target current value of secondary transfer ATVC control. Use Case When identifying the cause at the occurrence of an image failure Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1500...
Page 586 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD GAIN-OB Gain level of Read Sensor odd bit(B):frt Detail To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for front side).
Page 587 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD GAIN-EG Gain lvl of Read Sensor even bit(G):frt Detail To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for front side).
Page 588 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD LAMP2-CL Dspl LED light intnsty adj VL: clr, back Detail To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit (for back side) in color scanning mode.
Page 589 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD GAIN-BW4 Read Sensor gain level adj VL4: B&W, frt Detail To display the Reading Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 4 of Scanner Unit (for front side). Use Case When an image failure occurs at front side reading in black mode Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 590 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD GAIN2-OG Gain lvl of Read Sensor odd bit(G):back Detail To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit on the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for back side).
Page 591 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > CCD OFST2-CL Dspl Read Sensor offset value:clr, back Detail To display the offset value of the Reading Sensor of Scanner Unit (for back side) in color scanning mode.
Page 592 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DENS DENS-M Dspl M-color toner density change ratio Detail To display the deviation of M-color toner density from the target value in percentage (%). If the deviation is not acceptable, E020 occurs. This may be caused by deterioration of the developer, failure/disconnection of the Toner Density Sensor or error in toner supply system.
Page 593 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DENS DENS-S-C Dspl ATR control C-color patch density Detail To display C-color patch image density formed at ATR control. Use Case When analyzing the cause of image failure (fogging, carrier adherence, low density, etc.) Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1023 Appropriate Target Value...
Page 594 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DENS SGNL-C Display of C-color toner density Detail To display the measured value of C-color toner density. The density is measured with the ATR Sensor (C) for each job. The value is updated upon print operation after power-on.
Page 595 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DENS DEV-DC-K Dspl of Bk-color developing DC voltage Detail To display the latest Bk-color developing DC voltage Vdc. Use Case - When image failure occurs due to carrier adherence - When fogging occurs/is deteriorated Display/Adj/Set Range -1000 to 0...
Page 596 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DENS DENS-Y-H Dspl Y-clr TD ratio diff log: ATR ctrl Detail To display the latest 8 logs in which deviations (%) of Y-color toner density (TD ratio) detected by the ATR Sensor at ATR control from the target value are shown.
Page 597 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DENS DS-S-C-H Dspl of C-color patch image density log Detail To display the latest 8 C-color patch image density log data. It is the reference for judging the cause at E020 occurrence, etc. Sharp change in values may indicate the failure in the Registration Patch Sensor, shutter or laser, whereas gradual change may indicate failure in toner supply system.
Page 598 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DENS P-D-P-C Dspl front side (C/Bk) drk crrnt (Pwave) Detail To display the C/Bk-color dark current (P-wave) detected by the Registration Patch Sensor (Front). At low density or fogging deterioration, use this item to check whether there is a problem in the Registration Patch Sensor (Front).
Page 599 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > DENS P-D-S-C Dspl front side (C/Bk) drk crrnt (Swave) Detail To display the C/Bk-color dark current (S-wave) detected by the Registration Patch Sensor (Front). At low density or fogging deterioration, use this item to check whether there is a problem in the Registration Patch Sensor (Front).
Page 600 8. Service Mode ■ MISC COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > MISC ENV-TR Dspl of environment: sec trns ATVC ctrl Detail To display the environment (moisture content) at the time of the latest secondary transfer ATVC control execution.
Page 601 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > MISC TNRB-IDC Display of C-color Toner Container ID Detail To display the ID of C-color Toner Container that is installed to the machine. Use Case When checking whether the barcode ID on the Toner Container is read correctly Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range...
Page 602 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > HT-C TGT-A-C Dspl ARCDAT screen A C-color target VL Detail To display the C-color patch target value of screen A in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value).
Page 603 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > HT-C TGT-C-Y Dspl ARCDAT screen C Y-color target VL Detail To display the Y-color patch target value of screen C in ARCDAT control. When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range, execute the auto gradation adjustment (reset the target value).
Page 604: I/O
8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > DISPLAY (State display mode) > HT-C SGNL-A-C For R&D SGNL-A-K For R&D SGNL-B-Y For R&D SGNL-B-M For R&D SGNL-B-C For R&D SGNL-B-K For R&D SGNL-C-Y For R&D SGNL-C-M For R&D SGNL-C-K For R&D SGNL-C-C For R&D...
Page 605: Adjust (Adjustment Mode)
8. Service Mode ADJUST (Adjustment mode) ■ ADJ-XY COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > ADJ-XY ADJ-X Adj start pstn in book mode: vert scan Detail To adjust the image reading start position (image leading edge position) in the vertical scanning direction at copyboard reading.
Page 606 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > ADJ-XY ADJ-S Adjustment of Reader shading position Detail To adjust the Scanner Unit (for front side) position in feed direction when reading the White Plate on the left edge of the Copyboard Glass. When replacing the Scanner Unit, execute RDSHDPOS and write the value of this item in the service label.
Page 607 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > ADJ-XY ADJ-X-MG Fine adj img ratio: book mode, vert scan Detail To make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at copyboard reading. When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Page 608 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD W-PLT-Y Stdrd White Plt white lvl data (Y) entry Detail To enter the white level data (Y) for the Standard White Plate. When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data/replacing the Copyboard Glass, enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass.
Page 609 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD 100-GB Img Sensr GB color displace crrct: front Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Page 610 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD DFTAR-B Shading target VL (B) entry: front side Detail To enter the shading target value of Blue of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading. When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
Page 611 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF2-M4 MTF value 4 entry: horz scan, front side Detail To enter the setting value 4 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Page 612 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF2-M7 MTF value 7 entry: horz scan, front side Detail To enter the setting value 7 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Page 613 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF2-S1 MTF value 1 entry: vert scan, front side Detail To enter the setting value 1 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Page 614 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF2-S4 MTF value 4 entry: vert scan, front side Detail To enter the setting value 4 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Page 615 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF2-S7 MTF value 7 entry: vert scan, front side Detail To enter the setting value 7 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the Scanner Unit (for front side).
Page 616 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD 100DF2GB Img Sensr GB color displace crrct: back Detail To correct the color displacement between G and B lines in vertical scanning direction due to the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Page 617 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD DFCH2R10 Complex chart No.10 data (R) entry:front Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the front side of No.10 image in DADF complex chart.
Page 618 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD DFCH2G2 Complex chart No.2 data (G) entry: front Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the front side of No.2 image in DADF complex chart.
Page 619 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF-M2 MTF value 2 entry: horz scan, back side Detail To enter the setting value 2 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Page 620 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF-M5 MTF value 5 entry: horz scan, back side Detail To enter the setting value 5 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Page 621 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF-M8 MTF value 8 entry: horz scan, back side Detail To enter the setting value 8 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Page 622 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF-S2 MTF value 2 entry: vert scan, back side Detail To enter the setting value 2 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Page 623 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF-S5 MTF value 5 entry: vert scan, back side Detail To enter the setting value 5 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Page 624 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF-S8 MTF value 8 entry: vert scan, back side Detail To enter the setting value 8 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the Scanner Unit (for back side).
Page 625 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD DFCH-R10 Complex chart No.10 data (R) entry: back Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Red data on the back side of No.10 image in DADF complex chart.
Page 626 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD DFCH-G2 Complex chart No.2 data (G) entry: back Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the Green data on the back side of No.2 image in DADF complex chart.
Page 627 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF2-M11 MTF value 11 entry:horz scan, front side Detail To enter the setting value 11 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of the Scanner Unit (for front side). Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Page 628 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF2-S11 MTF value 11 entry:vert scan, front side Detail To enter the setting value 11 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the Scanner Unit (for front side). Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Page 629 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF-M11 MTF value 11 entry:horz scan, back side Detail To enter the setting value 11 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in horizontal scanning direction of the Scanner Unit (for back side). Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Page 630 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD MTF-S11 MTF value 11 entry:vert scan, back side Detail To enter the setting value 11 for calculating MTF filter coefficient in vertical scanning direction of the Scanner Unit (for back side). Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
Page 631 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD DFCH2K10 Complex chart No.10 data (B&W) entr: frt Detail To derive the front/back side linearity, enter the B&W data on the front side of No.10 image in DADF complex chart.
Page 632 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD DFTAR-BW Shading target VL (B&W) entry: front Detail To enter the B&W shading target value of the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading. When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (for front side), execute DF-WLVL3 and DF- WLVL4 and write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
Page 633 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CCD DFTBK-R Shading target VL (R) entry: back side Detail To enter the shading target value of Red of the Scanner Unit (for back side) at stream reading. When replacing the Main Controller PCB, enter the value of service label.
Page 634 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > IMG-REG REG-H-C Ruf adj C-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan Detail To adjust the write start position of C-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel. Use Case When C-color displacement in horizontal scanning direction occurs Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 635 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > IMG-REG REG-HS-K Fine adj Bk-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan Detail To adjust the write start position of Bk-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of less than 1 pixel. Use Case When Bk-color displacement in horizontal scanning direction occurs (smaller than 1 pixel) Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 636 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > IMG-REG REG-H-M Ruf adj M-clr wrt start pstn:horz scan Detail To adjust the write start position of M-color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel. Use Case When M-color displacement in horizontal scanning direction occurs Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 637 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > IMG-REG MAG-V Adj of stdrd magnifictn ratio: vert scan Detail To adjust the standard magnification ratio in the vertical scanning direction by changing the Polygon Motor speed. As the value is changed by 1, the magnification ratio is changed by 0.1%.
Page 638 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > IMG-REG LS-H-YC Adj Y-C copy ratio correction offset 2 Detail To adjust the offset of copy ratio correction between Y-color and C-color. Enter the value of a C-Y color set having the smallest degree of color displacement among the left image group of C-Y color printed on the corresponding PG.
Page 639 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > IMG-REG LS-H-MC Adj M-C copy ratio correction offset 2 Detail To adjust the offset of copy ratio correction between M-color and C-color. Enter the value of a C-M color set having the smallest degree of color displacement among the left image group of C-M color printed on the corresponding PG.
Page 640 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > IMG-REG LS-H-KC Adj Bk-C copy ratio correction offset 2 Detail To adjust the offset of copy ratio correction between Bk-color and C-color. Enter the value of a C-Bk color set having the smallest degree of color displacement among the left image group of C-Bk color printed on the corresponding PG.
Page 641 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > IMG-REG LS-V-YC Adj Y-C distortion correction offset 2 Detail To adjust the offset of distortion correction between Y-color and C-color. Enter the value of a C-Y color set having the smallest degree of color displacement among the left image group of C-Y color printed on the corresponding PG.
Page 642 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > IMG-REG LS-V-MC Adj M-C distortion correction offset 2 Detail To adjust the offset of distortion correction between M-color and C-color. Enter the value of a C-M color set having the smallest degree of color displacement among the left image group of C-M color printed on the corresponding PG.
Page 643 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > IMG-REG LS-V-KC Adj Bk-C distortion correction offset 2 Detail To adjust the offset of distortion correction between Bk-color and C-color. Enter the value of a C-Bk color set having the smallest degree of color displacement among the left image group of C-Bk color printed on the corresponding PG.
Page 644 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > IMG-REG SLOP-Y Adjustment of image squareness Detail To adjust skew of image (squareness) in the vertical scanning direction by adjusting skew of Y- color laser in the vertical scanning direction digitally. By performing auto color displacement correction after this adjustment, adjustment is made for other colors in accordance with adjustment for Y-color.
Page 645 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DENS SGNL-C ATR patch C-clr toner dens tgt VL entry Detail To enter the C-color toner density target value of ATR patch to be formed on the ITB. The C-color toner density is detected by the Registration Patch Sensor Unit (Front).
Page 646 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DENS HLMT-PTY Adj Y-clr toner dens tgt VL upper limit Detail To adjust the upper limit of the toner density target value of the Toner Density Sensor (Y). As the value is incremented by 1, the upper limit is increased by 0.5%.
Page 647 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DENS LLMT-PTY Adj Y-clr toner dens tgt VL lower limit Detail To adjust the lower limit of the toner density target value of the Toner Density Sensor (Y). As the value is incremented by 1, the lower limit is increased by 0.5%.
Page 648 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DENS T-SPLY-K For R&D DMAX-Y Adj D-max ctrl Y-color dens target VL Detail An image failure may occur because the density target value of D-max control becomes out of the setting table due to environment change.
Page 649 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DENS P-TG-M Adj of M-color ATR patch dens target VL Detail To adjust the offset of the M-color ATR patch density target value. When the target value determined upon initialization of the Developing Unit is changed, the TD ratio is also changed.
Page 650 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DENS DMAX-K Adj D-max ctrl Bk-color dens target VL Detail An image failure may occur because the density target value of D-max control becomes out of the setting table due to environment change.
Page 651 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DENS CONT-Y ATR Sensor (Y) control voltage entry Detail To enter the density detection control voltage of the ATR Sensor (Y). When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. Use Case When checking the value before replacement of the DC Controller PCB/clearing of RAM data and then re-entering the value after the processing is done...
Page 652 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DENS D-Y-LVL Entry of ATR patch Y-clr correction VL Detail To enter the Y-color correction value of ATR patch. The value is determined whenever the Developing Unit (Y) is initialized. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Page 653 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DENS PALPHA-F Enter Rgst Patch Sensor (Front) alpha VL Detail To enter the correction coefficient alpha value of the Registration Patch Sensor (Front). When replacing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit, enter the value written on the label included in the package of a new one and write the value in the service label.
Page 654 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DENS POFST-R1 Pch Sns (R) light-RX charcs: weak, Pwave Detail To enter the characteristic value of leakage light (P-wave) when the light intensity of the Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) is weak. When replacing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit, enter the value written on the label included in the package of a new one and write the value in the service label.
Page 655 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DENS SOFST-R1 Pch Sns (R) light-RX charcs: weak, Swave Detail To enter the characteristic value of leakage light (S-wave) when the light intensity of the Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) is weak. When replacing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit, enter the value written on the label included in the package of a new one and write the value in the service label.
Page 656 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DENS POFST-R2 Pch Sns (R) light-RX charcs: strg, Pwave Detail To enter the characteristic value of leakage light (P-wave) when the light intensity of the Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) is strong. When replacing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit, enter the value written on the label included in the package of a new one and write the value in the service label.
Page 657 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > DENS SOFST-R2 Pch Sns (R) light-RX charcs: strg, Swave Detail To enter the characteristic value of leakage light (S-wave) when the light intensity of the Registration Patch Sensor (Rear) is strong. When replacing the Registration Patch Sensor Unit, enter the value written on the label included in the package of a new one and write the value in the service label.
Page 658 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > BLANK BLANK-R Adjustment of right edge margin Detail To adjust the margin on the right edge of paper. As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the center of the paper by 1 pixel. Use Case - Upon user's request (to reduce the margin) - When increasing the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation...
Page 659 8. Service Mode ■ V-CONT COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > V-CONT VCONT-Y Adj of Y-color contrast potential Detail To adjust the contrast potential for Y-color. As the value is changed by 1, the contrast potential is changed by 5 V. +: Image becomes darker.
Page 660 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > V-CONT VCONT-C Adj of C-color contrast potential Detail To adjust the contrast potential for C-color. As the value is changed by 1, the contrast potential is changed by 5 V. +: Image becomes darker.
Page 661 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > V-CONT VBACK-Y Adj Y-color fog removal potential:1/1SPD Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Y-color at 1/1 speed. As the value is changed by 1, the fogging removal potential is changed by 10 V. +: Fogging is alleviated, but white/black spots are increased.
Page 662 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > V-CONT VBACK-K Adj Bk-clr fog removal potential:1/1SPD Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for Bk-color at 1/1 speed. As the value is changed by 1, the fogging removal potential is changed by 10 V. +: Fogging is alleviated, but white/black spots are increased.
Page 663 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > V-CONT VBACK2-C Adj C-color fog removal potential:1/2SPD Detail To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for C-color at 1/2 speed. As the value is changed by 1, the fogging removal potential is changed by 10 V. +: Fogging is alleviated, but white/black spots are increased.
Page 664 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > PASCAL OFST-PM2 Adj M-color density at test print read Detail To adjust the offset of M-color test print reading signal at auto gradation adjustment (full adjustment). When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value of the Sub Station service label.
Page 665 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > COLOR ADJ-M Adjustment of color balance for M-color Detail To adjust the default value of the color balance for M-color when the density of M-color varies between devices. As the value is larger, the image gets darker.
Page 666 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > COLOR OFST-M Adj M-clr brit area dens&color balance Detail To adjust the bright area density and color balance of M-color. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. Decrease the value when the background cannot be read correctly because the density of a document is dark and increase the value when the density of a document is light.
Page 667 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > COLOR LD-OFS-Y Adj Y low dens area clr balance: copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Y-color for copy operation. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in [Fine Adjust Density] in the main menu to the setting value of this item is applied as the actual density value.
Page 668 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > COLOR LD-OFS-C Adj C low dens area clr balance: copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of C-color for copy operation. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in [Fine Adjust Density] in the main menu to the setting value of this item is applied as the actual density value.
Page 669 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > COLOR MD-OFS-Y Adj Y mid dens area clr balance: copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Y-color for copy operation. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in [Fine Adjust Density] in the main menu to the setting value of this item is applied as the actual density value.
Page 670 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > COLOR MD-OFS-C Adj C mid dens area clr balance: copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of C-color for copy operation. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in [Fine Adjust Density] in the main menu to the setting value of this item is applied as the actual density value.
Page 671 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > COLOR HD-OFS-Y Adj Y hi dens area clr balance: copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Y-color for copy operation. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in [Fine Adjust Density] in the main menu to the setting value of this item is applied as the actual density value.
Page 672 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > COLOR HD-OFS-C Adj C hi dens area clr balance: copy Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of C-color for copy operation. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in [Fine Adjust Density] in the main menu to the setting value of this item is applied as the actual density value.
Page 673 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > COLOR PL-OFS-Y Adj Y-clr low dens area clr balance: PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Y-color at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box, a value obtained by adding the value adjusted in [Fine Adjust Density] in [Access Stored Files] to the setting value of this item is applied as the actual density value.
Page 674 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > COLOR PL-OFS-C Adj C-clr low dens area clr balance: PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the low density area of C-color at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box, a value obtained by adding the value adjusted in [Fine Adjust Density] in [Access Stored Files] to the setting value of this item is applied as the actual density value.
Page 675 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > COLOR PM-OFS-Y Adj Y-clr mid dens area clr balance: PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Y-color at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box, a value obtained by adding the value adjusted in [Fine Adjust Density] in [Access Stored Files] to the setting value of this item is applied as the actual density value.
Page 676 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > COLOR PM-OFS-C Adj C-clr mid dens area clr balance: PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of C-color at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box, a value obtained by adding the value adjusted in [Fine Adjust Density] in [Access Stored Files] to the setting value of this item is applied as the actual density value.
Page 677 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > COLOR PH-OFS-Y Adj Y-clr hi dens area clr balance: PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Y-color at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box, a value obtained by adding the value adjusted in [Fine Adjust Density] in [Access Stored Files] to the setting value of this item is applied as the actual density value.
Page 678 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > COLOR PH-OFS-C Adj C-clr hi dens area clr balance: PDL Detail To adjust the color balance of the high density area of C-color at PDL print. As the value is larger, the image gets darker. In case of data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box, a value obtained by adding the value adjusted in [Fine Adjust Density] in [Access Stored Files] to the setting value of this item is applied as the actual density value.
Page 679 8. Service Mode ■ HV-TR COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-PPR1 Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 1 Detail To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 1. Setting 1 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV1, TR-PPR1 and TR-DUP1.
Page 680 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-PPR2 Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 2 Detail To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 2. Setting 2 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV2, TR-PPR2 and TR-DUP2.
Page 681 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-PPR3 Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 3 Detail To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 3. Setting 3 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV3, TR-PPR3 and TR-DUP3.
Page 682 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-PPR4 Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 4 Detail To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 4. Setting 4 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV4, TR-PPR4 and TR-DUP4.
Page 683 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-PPR5 Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 5 Detail To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 5. Setting 5 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV5, TR-PPR5 and TR-DUP5.
Page 684 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-PPR6 Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 6 Detail To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 6. Setting 6 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV6, TR-PPR6 and TR-DUP6.
Page 685 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-PPR7 Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 7 Detail To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 7. Setting 7 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV7, TR-PPR7 and TR-DUP7.
Page 686 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-PPR8 Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 8 Detail To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 8. Setting 8 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV8, TR-PPR8 and TR-DUP8.
Page 687 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-ENV2 Sec trns indiv setting environment:set 2 Detail To set the environment (absolute moisture content) for setting 2. Setting 2 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV2, TR-PPR2 and TR-DUP2.
Page 688 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-ENV5 Sec trns indiv setting environment:set 5 Detail To set the environment (absolute moisture content) for setting 5. Setting 5 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV5, TR-PPR5 and TR-DUP5.
Page 689 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-ENV8 Sec trns indiv setting environment:set 8 Detail To set the environment (absolute moisture content) for setting 8. Setting 8 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV8, TR-PPR8 and TR-DUP8.
Page 690 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-DUP2 Sec trn indiv set clr mod/fd side: set 2 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 2. Setting 2 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV2, TR-PPR2 and TR-DUP2.
Page 691 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-DUP4 Sec trn indiv set clr mod/fd side: set 4 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 4. Setting 4 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV4, TR-PPR4 and TR-DUP4.
Page 692 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-DUP6 Sec trn indiv set clr mod/fd side: set 6 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 6. Setting 6 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV6, TR-PPR6 and TR-DUP6.
Page 693 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-DUP8 Sec trn indiv set clr mod/fd side: set 8 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 8. Setting 8 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV8, TR-PPR8 and TR-DUP8.
Page 694 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR 1TR-TGC Adj C pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/1 speed Detail To adjust the target current for C-color upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/1 speed. Increase the value when low-voltage mottled image occurs, and decrease the value when fogging occurs (especially in the 94 mm portion of the image leading edge).
Page 695 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR 1TR-TGY2 Adj Y pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt:1/2 speed Detail To adjust the target current for Y-color upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1/2 speed. Increase the value when low-voltage mottled image occurs, and decrease the value when fogging occurs (especially in the 95 mm portion of the image leading edge).
Page 696 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR T2TR-LNG Adj of lead edge weak bias apply length Detail To adjust the length (distance from the leading edge of paper) to apply leading edge weak bias. Increase the value when white spots occur in a broad area of the leading edge of paper.
Page 697 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-PPR9 Sec trns indiv setting paper type: set 9 Detail To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 9. Setting 9 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV9, TR-PPR9 and TR-DUP9.
Page 698 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-PPR10 Sec trn indiv setting paper type: set 10 Detail To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 10. Setting 10 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV10, TR-PPR10 and TR-DUP10.
Page 699 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-PPR11 Sec trn indiv setting paper type: set 11 Detail To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 11. Setting 11 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV11, TR-PPR11 and TR-DUP11.
Page 700 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-PPR12 Sec trn indiv setting paper type: set 12 Detail To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 12. Setting 12 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV12, TR-PPR12 and TR-DUP12.
Page 701 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-PPR13 Sec trn indiv setting paper type: set 13 Detail To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 13. Setting 13 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV13, TR-PPR13 and TR-DUP13.
Page 702 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-PPR14 Sec trn indiv setting paper type: set 14 Detail To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 14. Setting 14 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV14, TR-PPR14 and TR-DUP14.
Page 703 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-PPR15 Sec trn indiv setting paper type: set 15 Detail To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 15. Setting 15 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV15, TR-PPR15 and TR-DUP15.
Page 704 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-PPR16 Sec trn indiv setting paper type: set 16 Detail To set the paper type (paper weight) for setting 16. Setting 16 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV16, TR-PPR16 and TR-DUP16.
Page 705 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-ENV10 Sec trn indiv setting environment:set 10 Detail To set the environment (absolute moisture content) for setting 10. Setting 10 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV10, TR-PPR10 and TR-DUP10.
Page 706 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-ENV13 Sec trn indiv setting environment:set 13 Detail To set the environment (absolute moisture content) for setting 13. Setting 13 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV13, TR-PPR13 and TR-DUP13.
Page 707 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-ENV16 Sec trn indiv setting environment:set 16 Detail To set the environment (absolute moisture content) for setting 16. Setting 16 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV16, TR-PPR16 and TR-DUP16.
Page 708 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-DUP10 Sec trn indiv set clr mod/fd side:set 10 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 10. Setting 10 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV10, TR-PPR10 and TR-DUP10.
Page 709 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-DUP12 Sec trn indiv set clr mod/fd side:set 12 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 12. Setting 12 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV12, TR-PPR12 and TR-DUP12.
Page 710 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-DUP14 Sec trn indiv set clr mod/fd side:set 14 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 14. Setting 14 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV14, TR-PPR14 and TR-DUP14.
Page 711 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-DUP16 Sec trn indiv set clr mod/fd side:set 16 Detail To set the color mode and feed side for setting 16. Setting 16 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV16, TR-PPR16 and TR-DUP16.
Page 712 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-VL2 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 2 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 2. Setting 2 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV2, TR-PPR2 and TR-DUP2.
Page 713 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-VL4 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 4 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 4. Setting 4 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV4, TR-PPR4 and TR-DUP4.
Page 714 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-VL6 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 6 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 6. Setting 6 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV6, TR-PPR6 and TR-DUP6.
Page 715 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-VL8 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 8 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 8. Setting 8 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/feed side that are set in TR-ENV8, TR-PPR8 and TR-DUP8.
Page 716 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-VL10 Sec trn indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 10 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 10. Setting 10 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV10, TR-PPR10 and TR-DUP10.
Page 717 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-VL12 Sec trn indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 12 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 12. Setting 12 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV12, TR-PPR12 and TR-DUP12.
Page 718 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-VL14 Sec trn indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 14 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 14. Setting 14 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV14, TR-PPR14 and TR-DUP14.
Page 719 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > HV-TR TR-VL16 Sec trn indiv set ppr allot voltg:set 16 Detail To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 16. Setting 16 is the combination condition of environment, paper type (paper weight), color mode/ feed side that are set in TR-ENV16, TR-PPR16 and TR-DUP16.
Page 720 8. Service Mode ■ FEED-ADJ COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ REGIST Adj paper leading edge margin: 1/1 speed Detail To adjust the leading edge margin at 1/1 speed by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor.
Page 721 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ ADJ-C3 Write start pstn in horz scan:Cassette 3 Detail To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 3. (Paper width is 320 mm or smaller.) As the value is changed by 1, the left margin is changed by 0.1 mm.
Page 722 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ ADJ-C1RE Write start pstn in horz scan:Cst1 2nd Detail To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 1. As the value is changed by 1, the left margin is changed by 0.1 mm.
Page 723 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ ADJ-C4RE Write start pstn in horz scan:Cst4 2nd Detail To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 4. As the value is changed by 1, the left margin is changed by 0.1 mm.
Page 724 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ REG-DUP1 Adj ppr lead edge margin: 1/1 SPD, 2nd Detail To adjust the leading edge margin on the 2nd side at 1/1 speed by changing the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor.
Page 725 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ LP-FEED2 Adj pre-rgst arch amount: heavy, Casstt Detail To adjust the arch amount before registration for paper belonging to a group of heavy papers fed from a cassette. As the value is changed by 1, the arch amount is changed by 0.1 mm.
Page 726 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ LP-DUP1 Adj pre-rgst arch amount: plain, 2-sided Detail To adjust the arch amount before registration for paper belonging to a group of plain papers fed in 2-sided mode. As the value is changed by 1, the arch amount is changed by 0.1 mm.
Page 727 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ EXT-SPD Setting of delivery speed at 1/1 speed Detail To set the delivery speed of papers (thin paper 1/2, plain paper 1 to 3, colored paper, recycled paper 1 to 3, pre-punched paper and tracing paper) which are fed at 1/1 speed in the case of delivering to the First/Second Delivery Tray.
Page 728 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > FEED-ADJ LP-MULT3 Adj pre-rgst arch amount: thin, MP Tray Detail To adjust the arch amount before registration for thin paper 1/2 fed from the Multi-purpose Tray. As the value is changed by 1, the arch amount is changed by 0.1 mm. +: Increase -: Decrease At first, change the value in increments of 10, and then make a fine adjustment.
Page 729 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CST-ADJ CST-VLM3 Adj Cassette 3 level detect threshold VL Detail To adjust the timing to switch the scale indicating paper level in the Cassette 3 from "3" to "2". Since the paper level to display is switched at the height where papers are stacked, the paper level detection can be changed by adjusting the timing to detect it.
Page 730 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > CST-ADJ MF-MIN Adj of Multi-purpose Tray minimum width Detail To adjust the minimum width of the Multi-purpose Tray. When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label. When registering a new value, execute COPIER>...
Page 731 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > MISC ACS-ADJ Set criteria for B&W/color in ACS:front Detail To set whether to judge the original scanned with the Scanner Unit (for front side) in ACS mode as B&W/color original.
Page 732 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > MISC SEG-ADJ3 Set criteria for text/photo: back side Detail To set whether to judge the original scanned with the Scanner Unit (for back side) in Text/ Photo/Map mode as text or photo. As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a photo document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to be detected as a text document.
Page 733 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > MISC ACS-CNT3 ACS mode jdgmt pixel count area: back Detail To set the area to judge whether the image on the back side stream read with DADF (1-path model) is color or B&W at automatic color selection.
Page 734 8. Service Mode ■ EXP-LED COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > EXP-LED PR-EXP-M Adj Cln Pre-expo LED(M) intnsty: 1/1SPD Detail To adjust the light intensity of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M) at 1/1 speed. To set the proportion relative to the current value in percentage. Increase the value when drum ghost occurs, and decrease the value when horizontal lines appear due to charging.
Page 735 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > EXP-LED PR-EXPM2 Adj Cln Pre-expo LED(M) intnsty: 1/2SPD Detail To adjust the light intensity of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M) at 1/2 speed. Set the proportion relative to the current value in percentage. Increase the value when drum ghost occurs, and decrease the value when horizontal lines appear due to charging.
Page 736 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) > EXP-LED INTEXP-M Adj Cln Pre-expo LED(M) initial intnsty Detail To adjust the initial light intensity of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED (M). When replacing the LED, enter the value written on the label included in the package of a new one.
Page 737: Function (Operation / Inspection Mode)
8. Service Mode FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) ■ INSTALL COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL STIR-Y Stirring of Y-color developer Detail To stir developer in the Y-color Developing Unit. Use Case When fogging occurs on an image after the machine has not been used for a long time Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Page 738 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL STRD-POS Auto adj frt side read pstn: DADF stream Detail To automatically adjust the Scanner Unit (for front side) position in feed direction when stream reading original with DADF.
Page 739 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL INISET-M Exe of Dev Unit (M) initial install mod Detail To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Developing Unit (M). 1. Idle rotation of the Developing Unit (including automatic take-up of the developer sealing) 2.
Page 740 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL E-RDS ON/OFF of Embedded-RDS Detail To set whether to use the E-RDS. Use Case When using Embedded-RDS Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Page 741 This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended function is available. Use Case When the non-Canon-made extension function of the Embedded-RDS is available Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Page 742 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL INISET-4 All colors Dev Units initial instal mode Detail To automatically execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Developing Units for all colors. 1.
Page 743 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL RDSHDPOS Auto adj of Reader shading position Detail To automatically adjust the Scanner Unit (for front side) position in feed direction when reading the White Plate on the left edge of the Copyboard Glass. The adjustment result is reflected to ADJ-S.
Page 744 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL INSTDTST Batch set installation date info: YMDHN Detail Information on the current date and time is entered collectively in YMDHN of INSTDT by pressing INSTDTST.
Page 745 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > INSTALL FAX-USE Enable/disable FAX function Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To switch enable/disable of the FAX function of a device mounted with a FAX Board. Use Case When disabling the FAX function of a device mounted with a FAX Board Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 746 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD DF-LNR Deriving of DADF front/back linearity Detail To derive the front/back side linearity characteristics when using the DADF (1-path model) based on the scanned data that has been backed up at factory. The setting of this item is enabled only when the DADF (1-path model) is installed.
Page 747 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CCD DF-WLVL4 White level adj: stream reading, B&W Detail To adjust the white level for stream reading by setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the DADF.
Page 748 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CST MF-MIN Reg MP Tray min width standard value Detail To register the standard value of the minimum width on the Multi-purpose Tray. Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-MIN. Use Case - When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data - When registering a new value...
Page 749 8. Service Mode ■ PANEL COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PANEL LCD-CHK Check of LCD Panel dot missing Detail To check whether there is a missing dot on the LCD Panel of the Control Panel. Use Case When replacing the LCD Panel Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 750 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PART-CHK CL-ON Operation check of clutch Detail To start operation check of the clutch specified by CL. To repeat ON/OFF of the clutch 5 times at intervals of 3 seconds while the Developing Motor is being driven.
Page 751 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PART-CHK Specification of operation motor Detail To specify the motor to operate. Use Case When replacing the motor/checking the operation Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Caution - The Bk Drum _ ITB Motor (M02) and the CL Drum Motor (M03) operate at the same time.
Page 752 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > PART-CHK Specification of operation solenoid Detail To specify the solenoid to operate. Use Case When replacing the solenoid/checking the operation Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 2 1: Registration Shutter Solenoid (SL02), 2: Duplex Reverse Solenoid (SL06)
Page 753 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR JAM-HIST Clear of jam history Detail To clear the jam history. Use Case When clearing the jam history Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key. Related Service Mode COPIER>...
Page 754 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR MN-CON Deletion of setting values Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To delete the setting values of address lists, forwarding settings, Settings/Registration and service mode.
Page 755 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR CA-KEY Deletion of CA certificate and key pair Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To simultaneously delete the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally registered by the user.
Page 756 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > CLEAR JV-CACHE Cache clear of JAVA application Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To clear the cache information used by JAVA application. Use Case When initializing the JAVA application Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 757 4: A jar file and data of MEAP application which has been installed additionally Related Service Mode COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> JV-CACHE Supplement/Memo MEAP applications bundled as standard: system application, built-in login application MEAP applications installed additionally: non-Canon-made login application, general application, etc. CUSTOM2 [For customization] CNT-RCON...
Page 758 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-R RD-SHPOS Moving to Reader Scanner Unit fix pstn Detail To move the Reader Scanner Unit to the position where it is secured in when moving. When moving the Reader after installation, the Reader Scanner Unit may move and get damage.
Page 759 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P LBL-PRNT Output of service label Detail To print the service label. Use Case When printing the service label Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Place A4/LTR paper in Cassette 1. 2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Page 760 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P PJH-P-2 Outpt print job log detail info:all jobs Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To output all print job logs stored in the machine with detailed information (for maximum 5000 jobs). The difference between PJH-P-1 and this item is only the number of jobs output.
Page 761 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > MISC-P PSCL-PRT Output grdtn/clr tone crrct log report Detail To output the execution log of auto gradation adjustment/auto correction color tone in the form of a report.
Page 762 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SYSTEM CHK-TYPE Spec HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK exe partition No. Detail To specify the partition number of the HDD to execute HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK. Use Case When executing HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 763 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Backup of DC Controller PCB SRAM Detail To back up the setting data in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB. Use Case When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the time of trouble occurrence Adj/Set/Operate Method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Page 764 8. Service Mode ■ DBG-LOG COPIER (Service mode for printer) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) > DBG-LOG LOG2USB Storage of debug log to USB memory Detail To store a set of debug logs to the USB flash drive at the error occurrence. A type of log to be collected is set in LOG-TRIG.
Page 765: Option (Specification Setting Mode)
8. Service Mode OPTION (Specification setting mode) ■ FNC-SW COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW MODEL-SZ Fixed magnifictn & DADF orgnl dtct size Detail To set the fixed magnification ratio display and the original detection size with DADF. It is set automatically at the time of installation of the Reader according to the location.
Page 766 SI: Slovenia, GR: Greece, EE: Estonia, RU: Russia, SK: Slovakia, RO: Romania, HR: Croatia, BG: Bulgaria, TR: Turkey, TH: Thailand, VN: Vietnam, AR: Argentina, IN: India YY: Language (Fixed; e.g. ja: Japanese) ZZ: Location (Fixed; e.g. 00: CANON) AA: Paper size configuration (00: AB configuration, 01: Inch configuration, 02: A configuration, 03: Inch/AB configuration) Default Value It differs according to the location.
Page 767 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW ORG-LTRR Special ppr size set at stream read:LTRR Detail To set the size of special paper (LTRR configuration) that cannot be recognized in stream reading mode.
Page 768 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW BK-4CSW ON/OFF simple full clr mode:hvy ppr,Bk-m Detail To set whether to switch single Bk-color mode to simple full color mode according to the paper type.
Page 769 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW FXWRNLVL Set Fix Film life display threshold VL Detail To set the threshold value to display the life of Fixing Film. This item is used to prevent the occurrence of fixing failure caused by the continuous use of the Fixing Film beyond its life.
Page 770 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW SJB-UNW Reserve upper limit of secured print job Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the upper limit for the number of reserved jobs in secured print job. When 0 or 1 is set, jobs that exceed the upper limit are canceled.
Page 771 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW CNTR-SW Init of parts counter replacement timing Detail To return the estimated life of parts counter to the initial value. If either "00000000" or a value before the specification change is displayed in the estimated life value of the parts counter, set 0 after upgrading of the firmware.
Page 772 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW RPT2SIDE Set of report 1-sided/2-sided output Detail To set whether to use 1-sided or 2-sided for report output of service mode. Use Case When making 1-sided report output Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 773 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW CDS-FIRM Set to allow firmware update by admin Detail * Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to perform firmware update linked with CDS and collection of log files.
Page 774 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW LOCLFIRM Set to allow firmware update by file Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to update the firmware from the remote UI using a local file.
Page 775 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW PDL-Z-LG Setting of drawing algorithm Detail To switch the drawing algorithm of the iR C series and the iR-ADV C series to obtain output expected by the user. When 0 is set, image is output as displayed on the screen by the new algorithm adopted from the iR-ADV C Series.
Page 776 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW AMSOFFSW Enabling of AMS mode Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To enable the AMS mode. When 0 is set, the AMS mode is enabled.
Page 777 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW SVC-RUI Enabling of remote UI func for servicing Detail To set whether to enable the remote UI function for servicing (not provided to end users). When 0 is set, the remote UI function is disabled.
Page 778 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW NO-LGOUT Display/hide of logout button Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to display or hide [Logout] button. When 0 is set, [Logout] button is displayed on the screen, and logout with the ID key is enabled.
Page 779 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW SEND-SPD ON/OFF of SEND operation speed-up Detail To set whether to speed up the SEND operation. Usually, speed of SEND/XBOX is increased by performing image conversion during SEND and Scan.
Page 780 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW VER-CHNG Setting of firmware update operation Detail To set how to update firmware of PCB/option which has been installed/replaced by comparing the version of it with the version stored in the Flash PCB of the Main Controller. If combination of firmware versions of PCB/option stored in the Main Controller and the version in PCB/option after installation/replacement is not appropriate (operation with the combination of firmware versions has not yet been checked), failure where analysis is difficult may occur.
Page 781 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW PREXP-SW Set Clean Pre-exposure LED light condtn Detail To set the condition to light up the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED. When drum ghost occurs, set 1. If it is not alleviated, set 2. Use Case When drum ghost occurs Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 782 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FNC-SW JLG-FLT Set job log tiered billing cntr record Detail To set whether to record the values of tiered billing counters in job log. When 1 is set, counter values are recorded. When a value other than 0 is set for VC-CNT, this setting is enabled.
Page 783 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW UI-SEND ON/OFF of Send screen display Detail To set whether to display or hide the SEND function. Use Case Upon user's request Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Page 784 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW IMGC-ADJ [Not used] UI-RSCAN ON/OFF of remote scan screen display Detail To set whether to display the remote scan screen on the Control Panel. Use Case Upon user's request Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 785 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW RMT-CNSL Allow console application connection Detail To set whether to allow connection from a console application (RemoteConsole). When 1 is set, logs of MEAP application can be collected via the console application activated on a PC.
Page 786 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW UI-CUSTM ON/OFF of custom menu screen display Detail To set ON/OFF of the custom menu screen display on the Control Panel. Use Case When not displaying the custom menu screen on the Control Panel Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 787 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW COM10-DL ON/OFF of DL/COM10 landscape display Detail To set whether to display landscape direction for DL/COM10 (envelope) on the Select Paper screen of the Cassette 1. Use Case Upon user's request (to change the feed direction to landscape due to setting of a small number of envelopes on the Multi-purpose Tray and low productivity with portrait feeding)
Page 788 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW PCMP-DSP Set copy cmpl scrn dspl:chg w/devc alone Detail To set whether to display the screen indicating completion of copying at the time of charging with a device alone.
Page 789 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW RMT-CNCT Sw mssg dspl on machine w/o UGW connect Detail To set whether to display the message "Contact your service representative." to the customer who uses the machine without having UGW connected.
Page 790 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > DSPLY-SW JLG-UD-D [For customization] UFOS-DSP Display/hide of uniFLOW Setup Detail Service mode to switch to display or hide [uniFLOW Setup]. Use Case When to switch to display or hide [uniFLOW Setup] Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 791 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK SMTPRXPN Setting of SMTP reception port number Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set SMTP reception port number. Use Case Upon user's request Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 792 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK NS-NTLM Limit NTLM auth method at SMTP auth Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To restrict use of NTLM authentication method at the time of SMTP authentication. Use Case Upon user's request Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 793 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK NS-LGN Limit LOGIN authentication at SMTP auth Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To restrict use of LOGIN authentication at the time of SMTP authentication. Use Case Upon user's request Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 794 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK WUEN-LIV Recovery time setting after sleep notice Detail To set the time from the sleep start from network without job assignment until the mode is shifted to the sleep mode.
Page 795 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK PROXYRES Setting of proxy response to Windows Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to provide proxy response or return the device status when an inquiry is received via Windows while the device is in sleep mode.
Page 796 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK NCONF-SW ON/OFF of Network Configurator function Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set ON/OFF of Network Configurator function. If the user does not use the function, select OFF to prevent remote attack through network.
Page 797 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK ILOGKEEP Set of IP address block log hold time Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the retention time from the log time of IP block. When access is made again from a same IP address which was blocked before, if it is within the retention time of the previous log, its log is not recorded.
Page 798 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK SIPAUDIO Set of SIP session establishment order Detail To set whether to establish audio session or T.38 session first with SIP. Usually, audio session followed by T.38 session is established when using IPFAX in an intranet environment.
Page 799 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK FTPMODE Set of FTP print default operation mode Detail To set the default operation mode of FTP print. Switch the default operation mode between ASCII mode and BIN mode in accordance with user's environment.
Page 800 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK WLAN-USE Setting of wireless LAN invalidation Detail To set whether to disable the wireless LAN. Bringing in and installation of the wireless LAN equipment may be prohibited depending on user. In such case, set 0 to prevent the wireless LAN to be used.
Page 801 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > NETWORK WSMC-RST [Not used] INTENT For R&D USB-LAN Set whether to wire connect the sub line Detail To enable the sub line via wired connection (wired LAN adapter). "Wired LAN + Wired LAN"...
Page 802 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ENV-SET AINR-TM Set time not in use for drum idl rtn exe Detail To set the time the machine is not in use that is the condition to execute idle rotation of the drum. When the machine is not used for more than the specified time, idle rotation of the drum (60 seconds) is executed at warm-up rotation.
Page 803 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ENV-SET LES-CNDS Set of condensation prevention mode Detail To set the mode to prevent condensation. When 1 or 2 is set, idle rotation of the Reverse Roller is performed even when paper is delivered to the First Delivery Tray in the case of 1-sided output.
Page 804 8. Service Mode ■ CLEANING COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CLEANING OHP-PTH Set of ITB clean transp threshold value Detail To set the number of sheets as the intervals to execute ITB cleaning when feeding transparency. When a large number of transparencies is fed, surface active agent adheres to the ITB, and consequently the transfer efficiency is lowered, causing an image failure.
Page 805 8. Service Mode ■ FEED-SW COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FEED-SW EVLP-SPD Setting of envelope feeding speed Detail To set the feeding speed of envelope. By feeding an envelope at 1/2 speed (default) in the case of a high humidity environment, the glue flap may adhere at the time of fixing.
Page 806 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > FEED-SW TFL-RTC Set delvry dest at rcvry after tray full Detail To select the delivery destination for a job with multiple pages after recovering the Delivery Tray that reaches the full level.
Page 807 8. Service Mode ■ IMG-SPD COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-SPD FX-D-TMP Set small paper down sequence start temp Detail To set temperature to start the down sequence control to small size paper (length in width direction is less than that of A4R).
Page 808 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-SPD ARC-INT1 Set ARCDAT control interruption interval Detail To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which ARCDAT control is executed. When the number of sheets reaches the specified value, the control is executed at paper intervals by interrupting an ongoing job.
Page 809 8. Service Mode ■ IMG-RDR COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-RDR DFDST-L1 Adj img crrct level: stream read, front Detail To set whether to perform image correction between originals in the Scanner Unit (for front side) at stream reading based on the result of dust detection.
Page 810 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-RDR DFDST-L2 Adj dust dtct level: stream read, front Detail - In the case of DADF (reverse model) To adjust dust detection level for dust avoidance control that is executed in the Scanner Unit (for front side) after a stream reading job is completed.
Page 811 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-RDR DF2DSTL2 Adj dust dtct level:stream, back, 1-path Detail To adjust dust detection level for dust avoidance control that is executed in the Scanner Unit (for back side) at the first stream reading with DADF (1-path model) after power-on.
Page 812 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-MCON TMC-SLCT Set error diffusion process coefficient Detail To set coefficient to be used for error diffusion processing. Make the setting according to the level of granularity and dot stability. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 813 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-MCON TNR-DWN Setting of toner deposit amount Detail To set the toner deposit amount on the gradation area and text area. By reducing the toner deposit amount when toner scatters or paper winds around the Fixing Belt in color mode, symptom can be alleviated, but hue may change.
Page 814 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-MCON MIX-FLG Set img processing at img composition Detail To set the image processing which is performed when an image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate by the Main Controller upon image composition.
Page 815 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-MCON BMLNKS-Z Set img proc at BMLinkS reception print Detail To set the image processing which is performed when printing received BMLinkS. Use Case When there is a request for image improvement Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 816 Do not change the setting in the normal operation. Display/Adj/Set Range 1 to 3 1: CS-680 (Except for USA and EU. Mainly for Japan) 2: Canon Multipurpose Paper (For USA) 3: Oce RED Label80 (For EU) Default Value It differs according to the location.
Page 817 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-MCON BGE-OFS Fine adj at bckgd adj (bckgd removal) Detail To make a fine adjustment of the background adjustment (background removal) level which can be set manually. Break up the adjustment values into smaller ones when user does not satisfy with the default adjustment values.
Page 818 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-DEV PCHINT-V Adj ATR control patch detection interval Detail To adjust the total video counter value as the intervals to execute patch detection by ATR control. Decrease the value when hue variation is large.
Page 819 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-DEV DELV-THM Set image ratio for M-color toner eject Detail To set the threshold value of average image ratio of M-color, that is the condition to perform the low duty toner ejection sequence.
Page 820 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-DEV ADJ-BLNK Setting of thin line density improvement Detail To adjust the waveform of developing AC bias to improve thin line density. When thin line density is low, set 1 or 2. As the value is increased, the line gets darker, but white gap/white spots may occur.
Page 821 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-DEV DMX-OF-K Adj of Bk-color D-max target density Detail To adjust the target density of D-max control in the case where density of solid area on Bk-color image is not appropriate even when auto gradation adjustment is executed.
Page 822 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-DEV DELV-DNS ON/OFF of soiled paper edge prevention Detail Soiling on the guide rib caused by toner band formed at low duty toner ejection sequence may adhere on the paper edge.
Page 823 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX TMP-TBL2 Set fixing control temp: heavy paper 1 Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for heavy paper 1 (106 to 128 g/m2). As the value is changed by 1, the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C.
Page 824 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX TMP-TBL5 Set fixing control temp: thin ppr 1 Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for thin paper 1 (60 to 63 g/m2). As the value is changed by 1, the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C.
Page 825 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX FXS-TMP3 Set ITOP control temp: heavy paper 2 Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for heavy paper 2 (129 to 150 g/m2). As the value is changed by 1, the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C.
Page 826 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX FXS-TMP6 Set ITOP control temperature: envelope Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for envelope. As the value is changed by 1, the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C. Decrease the value when uneven gloss occurs, and increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper.
Page 827 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX FLYING ON/OFF of flying start temperature ctrl Detail To set whether to execute flying start temperature control. When 1 is set, flying start temperature control is not performed. Selecting 1 has an advantage over selecting 0 in terms of the life of the Fixing Unit.
Page 828 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX TMP-TBL9 Set fixing control temp: coated paper 1 Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for coated paper 1 (106 to 128 g/m2). As the value is changed by 1, the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C.
Page 829 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX FXS-TMP8 Set ITOP control temp: transparency Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for transparency. As the value is changed by 1, the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C. Decrease the value when uneven gloss occurs, and increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper.
Page 830 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX FXS-TMP9 Set ITOP control temp: coated paper 1 Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for coated paper 1 (106 to 128 g/m2). As the value is changed by 1, the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C.
Page 831 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX FX-WNKL Set of thin paper wrinkle alleviation Detail To set the thin paper wrinkle alleviation mode. If the edge temperature of the Fixing Pressure Roller is lower than the center temperature, feeding speed at the center of a paper becomes faster than the speed at the edge so wrinkles occur on thin paper.
Page 832 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX TMP-TB11 Set fixing control temp:recycled paper 1 Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for recycled paper 1 (64 to 75 g/m2). As the value is changed by 1, the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C. Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs, and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs.
Page 833 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX FXS-TM12 Set ITOP control temp: plain paper 3 Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for plain paper 3 (91 to 105 g/m2). As the value is changed by 1, the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C.
Page 834 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX TMP-TB17 Set fixing control temp:recycled paper 3 Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for recycled paper3 (91 to 105 g/m2). As the value is changed by 1, the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C. Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs, and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs.
Page 835 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX FXS-TM17 Set ITOP control temp: extra-long pln Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for extra-long plain paper 1 to 3, recycled paper 1 to 3, thin paper 1/2, colored paper, tracing paper, pre-punched paper and bond paper (width: 300 to 320 mm).
Page 836 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX FXS-TM19 Set ITOP control temp: extra-long hvy 2 Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for extra-long heavy paper 1 to 7, coated paper 1 to 5 and label (width: 305.1 to 320 mm).
Page 837 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX TMP-TB20 Set fixing control temp: extra-long pln Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for extra-long plain paper 1 to 3, recycled paper 1 to 3, thin paper 1/2, colored paper, tracing paper, pre-punched paper and bond paper (width: 300 to 320 mm).
Page 838 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX FXS-TM20 Set ITOP control temp: plain, 1/2 SPD Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for plain paper 1 to 3, recycled paper 1 to 3, thin paper 1/2, colored paper, tracing paper, pre-punched paper and bond paper at 1/2 speed.
Page 839 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX FXS-TM25 Set ITOP ctrl temp:hvy5, label, postcard Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for heavy paper 5 (181 to 220 g/m2), label and postcard.
Page 840 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX FXS-TM28 Set ITOP control temp: coated paper 4 Detail To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for coated paper 4 (221 to 256 g/m2). As the value is changed by 1, the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C.
Page 841 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX TMP-TB25 Set fix ctrl temp:hvy 5, label, postcard Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for heavy paper 5 (181 to 220 g/m2), label and postcard.
Page 842 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX TMP-TB28 Set fixing control temp: coated paper 4 Detail To set the offset of fixing control temperature for coated paper 4 (221 to 256 g/m2). As the value is changed by 1, the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C.
Page 843 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > IMG-FIX FIX-RTTH ON/OFF horz line prev:heavy, coat, trnsp Detail To set whether to rotate the Fixing Pressure Roller and the Fixing Film after 36 hours have passed from completion of fixing operation.
Page 844 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM SCANTYPE Switching of DADF + Reader type Detail To switch the type of DADF + Reader to a different type. Use Case At installation Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1...
Page 845 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM DEV-SP5 Device special settings 5 Detail To execute the device special setting. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given.
Page 846 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM RDEV-SP2 RCON device special settings 2 Detail To execute the device special setting. Use Case For customization Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Page 847 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM RDEV-SP7 RCON device special settings 7 Detail To execute the device special setting. Use Case For customization Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Page 848 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER SIZE-DET ON/OFF of original size detect function Detail To set ON/OFF of original size detection function. Use Case Upon user's request (The LED is too bright, etc.) Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 849 Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set charge count transmission of PDL job to the connecting charging management device (Coin Manager or non-Canon-made control card). Use Case Upon user's request Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 850 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER B4-L-CNT Count setting of B4 size Detail To set B4 count with software counter 1 to 8 as to whether B4 is counted as large size or small size.
Page 851 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER OP-SZ-DT Orgnl size dtct ON/OFF at copyboard open Detail To set ON/OFF of original size detection while the Copyboard is opened. When "0: OFF" is set, enter original size manually from the Control Panel. When "1: ON"...
Page 852 1 at the time of Collate mode, as bind figure while the value of COPIES command for the next page or later is invalid. Same control applies as Canon-made PCL at the time of non- sorted mode)
Page 853 Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0: No transmission, 1: Transmission Default Value Supplement/Memo Charging management device: Coin Manager, Non-Canon-made control card DFLT-CPY Setting of color mode for copy Detail To set the default color mode for copy operation. To reflect the change, it is necessary to initialize the default settings of copy function in one of the following two ways.
Page 854 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER DPT-ID-7 Password entry set at dept ID reg/auth Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to require a password entry at the time of registration/authentication of department With the setting to require entry, entry of 7-digit password is required as well as entry of department Use Case Upon user's request...
Page 855 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER IFAX-PGD Set page split TX at IFax Simple mode TX Detail To set whether to perform split-data transmission on a page basis in the case that the transmission size in I-Fax Simple mode exceeds the upper limit value.
Page 856 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER PTJAM-RC Auto reprint setting at PDL print jam Detail To set to automatically restart printing after jam recovery that occurs with PDL print. Use Case Upon user's request Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 857 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER COUNTER7 Setting of software counter 7 Detail To set counter type for software counter 7 on the Counter Check screen. Use Case Upon user/dealer's request Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 858 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER JA-RESTR Display of job archive restriction items Detail To display restriction items for job archive specification. When the job archive function is ON, follow the setting to execute operation to restrict specification. Make the setting with the MEAP program which supports job archiving.
Page 859 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER MAIL-OF Setting of e-mail TX to entered address Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to allow e-mail transmission to a newly entered address. When 1 is set, e-mail transmission is not available by entering the address because "E-mail"...
Page 860 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER JA-COMPR Dspl job archive record compress ratio Detail To display the compression ratio of images for job archives recorded in jobs other than FAX reception and I-Fax reception, etc. In service mode, display is available, but settings cannot be made.
Page 861 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER JA-FORMT Display of job archive record format Detail To display the format of images for job archives recorded in jobs other than FAX reception and IFAX reception, etc.
Page 862 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER USBM-DSP ON/OFF USB ex-mem device MEAP driver use Detail To set whether to display [Use MEAP Driver for USB Storage Device] in [Settings/Registration]. When 0 is set, the item is not displayed so that the user administrator cannot change the setting. Use Case When not allowing the user administrator to select whether to use the MEAP driver Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 863 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER POL-SCAN ON/OFF Rights Management Server set dspl Detail When "1: Display" is set, the Rights Management Server function screen is displayed. While the Rights Management Server function is a standard feature, it is possible to hide if not necessary.
Page 864 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER JA-BOX Setting of Inbox document operation: SAM Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the operation for Inbox document at the time of iW SAM When 1 is set, the Inbox document can be operated.
Page 865 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER JA-JOBK Setting of job merge allowance:SAM Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether merging jobs is allowed when iW SAM is enabled. When 1 is set, jobs can be merged.
Page 866 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER EXP-CRYP Confdntial encrypt ON/OFF:add book exprt Detail * Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to encrypt the confidential part (password part) in the Address Book when exporting the address book and device settings via remote UI.
Page 867 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER SJ-UNMSK ON/OFF secured job masking cancellation Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set whether to mask other people's secured jobs. When 0 is set, operation of other people's secured jobs is not possible because they are masked.
Page 868 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER SFT-OUT Setting of offset priority delivery Detail To set whether to deliver a job where offset and collate/offset group is set to the delivery destination with offset function.
Page 869 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER VC-AVE Set tiered base pricing calculate method Detail To set the calculation method of video count correction value to be used for the tiered base pricing. When 0 is set, the correction value is derived by averaging the video count values for 3 colors (Y/ M/C).
Page 870 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER CNT-PRT ON/OFF of parts counter report output Detail To set whether to print parts counter values on the counter report. Use Case When grasping the estimated life of parts while the monitoring service function is not used Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 871 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER TNRBRMVR ON/OFF mssg dspl at Tonr Cntner removal Detail To set whether to display a message when the Toner Container is removed although it can still be used.
Page 872 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > USER INSTDT-N Register installation date info: minute Detail To set the information on the installation date (minute). Use Case - At installation - When replacing the HDD Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 873 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CST CST2-P1 Setting of Cst2 paper size (A5R/STMTR) Detail To set the paper size (A5R/STMTR) used in the Cassette 2. Use Case When setting the paper size for the Cassette 2 Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 874 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CST C2-K-SW Set of EXEC/16K size support: Cassette 2 Detail To set whether to support EXEC or 16K size (K-size paper) by the Cassette 2. This setting is enabled only for the location where K-size paper can be selected in the Control Panel menu.
Page 875 8. Service Mode ■ ACC COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC COIN Setting of charge management Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set charge management method. Use Case At installation of Coin Manager Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 876 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC CARD-SW Set screen dspl: Coin Manager connected Detail To set coin or card that the user is prompted to insert on the Control Panel when the Coin Manager is connected.
Page 877 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC UNIT-PRC Setting of Coin Manager currency unit Detail To set currency unit to be handled with Coin Manager Use Case At installation of Coin Manager Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 878 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC MIC-TUN Manual adj of voice recognize microphone Detail To manually adjust the voice receiving level (sensitivity) of the connected voice recognition microphone. Microphone sensitivity is automatically tuned in [Settings/Registration]; however, adjust it manually as needed.
Page 879 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > ACC CV-CSZ Set outpt info notice:chg w/device alone Detail To set whether to notify the Coin Manager of color mode and paper size at the time of charging with a device alone.
Page 880 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > INT-FACE NWCT-TM Timeout setting of network connection Detail *Operation on this item is restricted by the setting of [Restrict Service Representation Access]. To set the time to keep network connection between this machine and the PC application (keep- alive setting).
Page 881 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-ENPDF Install state dspl of Encryption PDF Detail To display installation state of Encryption PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. Use Case When checking whether Encryption PDF is installed Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-ENPDF.
Page 882 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-EXPDF Trns lcns key of Encry PDF+Searchbl PDF Detail To display transfer license key to use Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF when disabling and then transferring the license.
Page 883 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-BRDIM Install state dspl: PCL Barcode Printing Detail To display installation state of Barcode Printing for PCL when disabling and then transferring the license. Use Case When checking whether Barcode Printing for PCL is installed Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-BRDIM.
Page 884 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-WEB Trns license key dspl of Web Access Soft Detail To display transfer license key to use Web Access Software when disabling and then transferring the license.
Page 885 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-WTMRK Install state dspl of Secure Watermark Detail To display installation state of Secure Watermark when disabling and then transferring the license. Use Case When checking whether Secure Watermark is installed Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-WTMRK.
Page 886 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-USPDF Trns lcns key dspl of Dgtl User Sign PDF Detail To display transfer license key to use Digital User Signature PDF when disabling and then transferring the license.
Page 887 Display/Adj/Set Range When operation finished normally: OK! Default Value According to the setting at shipment Supplement/Memo Monitoring service function: A function to send charge counter to the non-Canon-made charge server. TR-ERDS Trns lcns key dspl: E-RDS 3rd Pty Expnsn Detail To display transfer license key to use E-RDS non-Canon-made extension function when disabling and then transferring the license.
Page 888 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-PS Transfer license key dspl of PS function Detail To display transfer license key to use PS function when disabling and then transferring the license. Use Case - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device...
Page 889 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-LIPS5 Install state dspl:LIPS LX/LIPS4 func:JP Detail To display installation state of LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) when disabling and then transferring the license. Use Case When checking whether LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-LIPS5.
Page 890 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-PSPCL Transfer license key dspl of PS/PCL func Detail To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL function when disabling and then transferring the license. Use Case - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device...
Page 891 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-PSPCU Install state dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func Detail To display installation state of PS/PCL/UFR II function when disabling and then transferring the license. Use Case When checking whether PS/PCL/UFR II function is installed Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-PSPCU.
Page 892 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-HDCR2 Trns lcns key dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set Detail To display transfer license key to use HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when disabling and then transferring the license. Use Case - When replacing HDD - When replacing the device...
Page 893 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-REPDF Install state dspl:Reader Extensions PDF Detail To display installation state of Reader Extensions PDF when disabling and then transferring the license. Use Case When checking whether Reader Extensions PDF is installed Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-REPDF.
Page 894 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-XPS Trns lcns key dspl of Direct Print XPS Detail To display transfer license key to use Direct Print XPS when disabling and then transferring the license.
Page 895 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-NCAPT Install state display of NetCap function Detail To display installation state of network packet capture function when disabling and then transferring the license. Use Case When checking whether network packet capture function is installed Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select ST-NCAPT.
Page 896 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-U-RDS Trns license key dspl of E-RDS function Detail To display transfer license key to use Embedded-RDS function when disabling and then transferring the license. Use Case - When replacing the HDD - When replacing the device...
Page 897 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR ST-TCFNT Inst state dspl:PCL Asian Font, trad CHI Detail To display installation state of PCL Asian Font (traditional Chinese) when disabling and then transfer the license. Use Case When checking whether PCL Asian Font (traditional Chinese) is installed Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 898 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > LCNS-TR TR-HCD Trn lcns key dspl: IEEE2600 Security Kit Detail To display transfer license key to use the Security Kit for IEEE2600 when disabling and then transferring the license of it.
Page 899 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM2 SP-B32 [For customization] SP-B33 [For customization] SP-B34 [For customization] SP-B35 [For customization] SP-B36 [For customization] SP-B37 [For customization] SP-B38 [For customization] SP-B39 [For customization] SP-B40 [For customization] SP-B41 [For customization]...
Page 900 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM2 SP-B73 [For customization] SP-B74 [For customization] SP-B75 [For customization] SP-B76 [For customization] SP-B77 [For customization] SP-B78 [For customization] SP-B79 [For customization] SP-B80 [For customization] SP-V01 [For customization] SP-V02 [For customization]...
Page 901 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM2 SP-V34 [For customization] SP-V35 [For customization] SP-V36 [For customization] SP-V37 [For customization] SP-V38 [For customization] SP-V39 [For customization] SP-V40 [For customization] SP-V41 [For customization] SP-V42 [For customization] SP-V43 [For customization]...
Page 902 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > CUSTOM2 SP-V75 [For customization] SP-V76 [For customization] SP-V77 [For customization] SP-V78 [For customization] SP-V79 [For customization] SP-V80 [For customization] ■ PM-PRE-M COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-PRE-M TONER-Y Dspl/hide Toner (Y) preparation warning Detail...
Page 903 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-PRE-M WST-TNR Display/hide Wst Tonr Cont prep warning Detail To switch between display/hide the preparation warning on the Control Panel Status Bar. Use Case In the case of displaying the warning when consumables/consumable parts are not automatically delivered Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 904 8. Service Mode ■ PM-EXC-M COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-EXC-M PT-DR-Y Dspl/hide Drum-U (Y) Replacement message Detail To switch between display/hide the Replacement message on the Control Panel Status Bar. Use Case When a non-technical person will replace the drum unit Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 905 8. Service Mode ■ PM-MSG-D COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-MSG-D TONER-Y Set days left before Toner (Y) prep warn Detail To set the timing (number of days left) at which the preparation warning will be displayed. Use Case When changing the timing (number of days left) at which the preparation warning will be displayed Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 906 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-MSG-D PT-DR-M Set days left before Drm-U (M) prep warn Detail To set the timing (number of days left) at which the preparation warning will be displayed. Use Case When changing the timing (number of days left) at which the preparation warning will be displayed Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 907 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-DLV-D TONER-K Set Toner (Bk) prior alarm notice timing Detail To set the number of days left before the prior notification alarm will be notified. Use Case When changing the timing to notify the prior notification alarm Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 908: Test (Print Test Mode)
8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) > PM-DLV-D 2TR-ROLL For R&D FX-UNIT For R&D DF-PU-RL For R&D DF-FD-RL For R&D DF-SP-RL For R&D DF-PR-PD For R&D TEST (Print test mode) ■ PG COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > PG TYPE Test print Detail...
Page 909 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > PG THRU Set image correct table use: test print Detail To set whether to use the image correction table at the time of test print output. Use Case At problem analysis Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 910 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > PG COLOR-M Setting of M-color output at test print Detail To set whether to output M-color at the time of test print. The setting is applied to all types. When setting COLOR-M to 1 and COLOR-Y/C/K to 0, a single M-color is output.
Page 911 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > PG 2-SIDE Setting of PG 2-sided mode Detail To set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output. Use Case At trouble analysis Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided...
Page 912 8. Service Mode ■ NETWORK COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > NETWORK PING Network connection check Detail To check connection between this machine and TCP/IP network. Use Case - When checking network connection at the time of installation - At network connection failure Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Turn OFF the main power switch.
Page 913 8. Service Mode ■ NET-CAP COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > NET-CAP CAPOFFON ON/OFF of NetCap function Detail To set ON/OFF of network packet capture function. Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 1 0: OFF, 1: ON...
Page 914 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > NET-CAP PAYLOAD Set network packet capture data save Detail To set whether to discard payload when saving the captured packet data. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Page 915 8. Service Mode ■ P-STOP COPIER (Service mode for printer) > TEST (Print test mode) > P-STOP PRINTER Forcible stop of paper feed Detail To forcibly stop paper for the next job at the specified position (only once). Leading edge of paper stops at the specified position so that the cause of a problem can be identified.
Page 916 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > TOTAL SERVICE2 Service-purposed total counter 2 Detail To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine. Large size: 2, Small size: 1 A blank sheet is not counted. Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range...
Page 917 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > TOTAL SCAN Scan counter Detail To count the number of scan operations according to the charge counter when the scanning operation is complete. Large size: 1, Small size: 1 Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range...
Page 918 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PICK-UP Multi-purpose Tray pickup total counter Detail Total pickup counter value of the Multi-purpose Tray Large size: 1, Small size: 1 Use Case When checking the counter Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) Display/Adj/Set Range...
Page 919 8. Service Mode ■ JAM COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JAM TOTAL Host machine total jam counter Detail Total number of jam occurrences in the host machine Use Case When checking the jam counter Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Page 920 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > JAM Cassette 1 jam counter Detail The number of pickup jam occurrences in the Cassette 1 Use Case When checking the jam counter Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key. Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999 Unit...
Page 921 8. Service Mode ■ MISC COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > MISC T-SPLY-Y Y-color toner supply counter Detail To count up the number of Y-color toner supply blocks with each half turn of the Toner Container. Use Case When checking the usage status of toner Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 922 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > MISC HDD-ON Number of hard disk start-up times Detail To count up when power of the hard disk is turned ON. Use Case When judging whether to shift the machine to power-saving state after using the printer or scanner for a job Display/Adj/Set Range 0 to 99999999...
Page 923 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 T-CLN-BD ITB Cleaning Blade parts counter Detail ITB Cleaning Blade 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Page 924 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 PT-DRM Drum Unit (Bk) parts counter Detail Drum Unit (Bk) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Page 925 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 DV-UNT-K Developing Unit (Bk) parts counter Detail Developing Unit (Bk) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Page 926 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 C1-FD-RL Cassette 1 Feed Roller parts counter Detail Cassette 1 Feed Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 927 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 C2-FD-RL Cassette 2 Feed Roller parts counter Detail Cassette 2 Feed Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 928 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 M-FD-RL Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roll prts cntr Detail Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 929 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 FX-UP-FR Fixing Film Unit parts counter Detail Fixing Film Unit 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Page 930 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 REG-DR-U Registration Drive Unit parts counter Detail Registration Drive Unit 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Page 931 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 PT-DR-Y Drum Unit (Y) parts counter Detail Drum Unit (Y) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Page 932 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 TR-ROLK Primary Transfer Roller(Bk) prts counter Detail Primary Transfer Roller (Bk) Due to engagement/disengagement of the roller, the counter is advanced separately from Y, M, and C. 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value Use Case...
Page 933 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-1 R-DOOR Right Door Unit parts counter Detail Right Door Unit 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Page 934 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 DF-FD-RL Feed Roller parts counter: DADF Detail Feed Roller (DADF) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Page 935 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 DF-HNG-L Left Hinge parts counter: DADF, reverse Detail Left Hinge of the DADF (reverse model) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value The counter of this item is also advanced when the DADF (1-path model) is installed, but there is no consumable parts to be replaced.
Page 936 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 C3-FD-RL Cassette 3 Feed Roller parts counter Detail Cassette 3 Feed Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 937 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 C4-FD-RL Cassette 4 Feed Roller parts counter Detail Cassette 4 Feed Roller 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 938 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 TRY-TQLM Tray Torq Limt pts cntr:Fin-AA1 Detail Stack Tray Torque Limiter 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Page 939 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 FR-STPL Staple free stapling counter: Fin-K1/AA1 Detail Number of executions of staple free stapling (including at the time of paper dust removal) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts...
Page 940 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 TRY-STC1 Delvry Ass'y Sttc Elim: Fin-AA1/Sort-A1 Detail Fin-AA1: Escape Delivery Assembly Static Eliminator Sort-A1: Delivery Assembly Static Eliminator 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life value Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts...
Page 941 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > DRBL-2 DF-PR-PD Pre-separation Unit parts counter: DADF Detail Pre-separation Unit (DADF) 1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line: Estimated life Use Case When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts Adj/Set/Operate Method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Page 942 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PAPER G60-63 Delivered sheet counter: 60 to 63 g/m2 Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 60 to 63 g/m2. 1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size. 2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Page 943 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PAPER G129-150 Delivered sheet counter: 129 to 150 g/m2 Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 129 to 150 g/m2. 1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size. 2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Page 944 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > PAPER G257-300 Delivered sheet counter: 257 to 300 g/m2 Detail To count up the number of delivered sheets which weight is 257 to 300 g/m2. 1st line: The counter is advanced by 1 for both small size and large size. 2nd line: The counter is advanced by 1 for small size and by 2 for large size.
Page 945 8. Service Mode ■ LIFE COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > LIFE TONER-Y Toner (Y):Life VL and No. of days left Detail To display the life value and the number of days left of Toner (Y).The 3rd and 4th columns may be hidden depending on the country.
Page 946 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > LIFE TONER-K Toner (Bk): Life VL and No. of days left Detail To display the life value and the number of days left of Toner (Bk).The 3rd and 4th columns may be hidden depending on the country.
Page 947 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > LIFE PT-DR-Y Drum Unit (Y): Life VL/No. of days left Detail To display the life value and the number of days left of Drum Unit (Y).The 3rd and 4th columns may be hidden depending on the country.
Page 948 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > LIFE PT-DR-C Drum Unit (C): Life VL/No. of days left Detail To display the life value and the number of days left of Drum Unit (C).The 3rd and 4th columns may be hidden depending on the country.
Page 949 8. Service Mode COPIER (Service mode for printer) > COUNTER (Counter mode) > LIFE DF-PR-PD For R&D...
Page 950 8. Service Mode FEEDER (ADF service mode) DISPLAY (State display mode) FEEDER (ADF service mode) > DISPLAY (State display mode) FEEDSIZE Dspl orgnl size detected by DADF/Cpybrd Detail To display the original size detected by the DADF/Copyboard. Use Case When checking the paper size recognized by the machine after scanning Adj/Set/Operate Method N/A (Display only) TRY-WIDE...
Page 951 8. Service Mode FEEDER (ADF service mode) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) LA-SPEED Fine adj img ratio:stream read,vert scan Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in vertical scanning direction at stream reading. When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Page 952 8. Service Mode FEEDER (ADF service mode) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) ADJMSCN1 Fine adj img ratio: stream,horz scan,frt Detail To make a fine adjustment of the image magnification ratio in horizontal scanning direction on the front side at stream reading. As the value is incremented by 1, the image is enlarged by 0.1% in horizontal scanning direction.
Page 953 8. Service Mode FEEDER (ADF service mode) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) TRY-LTR Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: LTR Detail To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 1 for the DADF Original Pickup Tray. (LTR) Use Case - When installing DADF - When replacing the Main Controller PCB/clearing the Reader-related RAM data...
Page 954 8. Service Mode FEEDER (ADF service mode) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) FAN-CHK Specification of DADF operation fan Detail To specify the fan of DADF to operate. The fan is activated by FAN-ON. Use Case At operation check Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 955 8. Service Mode FEEDER (ADF service mode) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) MTR-ON Operation check of DADF motor Detail To start operation check for the motor specified by MTR-CHK. Use Case At operation check Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key. The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and automatically stops.
Page 956 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) ADJUST (Adjustment mode) SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) PNCH-Y Adj punch hole horz rgst pstn:Fin-AA1 Detail To adjust the punch hole position in side registration direction. As the value is changed by 1, the punch hole is moved by 0.1 mm.
Page 957 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) STP-2P Adj 2-stapling position: Fin-K1/AA1 Detail To adjust the 2-staple position. As the value is changed by 1, the staple position is moved by 0.1 mm. +: Toward rear -: Toward front When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Page 958 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) SDL-STP Adj Saddle Sttch staple position:Fin-AA1 Detail To adjust the staple position of Saddle Stitcher. As the value is changed by 1, the staple position is moved by 0.1 mm. +: Moves in the left direction of the spread -: Moves in the right direction of the spread When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Page 959 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) ST-ALG1 Adj Stacker A4 align pstn:Fin-AA1 Detail To adjust the A4 size paper alignment position of the Process Tray. As the value is changed by 1, position of the Alignment Plate is moved by 0.1 mm. +: Inward -: Outward When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Page 960 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) SW-UP-RL Adj of swing unit height:Fin-AA1 Detail To adjust the height of the Swing Unit. As the value is changed by 1, the height of the Swing Unit is changed by 0.1 mm. +: Move down -: Move up When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Page 961 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) NST-SPD Adj dvry speed at non-collate:Fin-AA1 Detail To adjust the delivery speed to the stack tray in non-collate mode. As the value is incremented by 1, the delivery speed is increased by 10 mm/sec. Use Case When the stacking condition in non-collate mode is poor Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 962 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) FR-STP-Y Adj stpl free stpl pstn (F/R):Fin-K1/AA1 Detail To adjust the staple position in front/rear direction at staple-free stapling. As the value is changed by 1, the staple position is moved by 0.1 mm. +: Toward rear -: Toward front When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Page 963 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) MSTP-2P Adj manual stapling position:Fin-K1/AA1 Detail To adjust the staple position in front/rear direction at manual stapling. As the value is changed by 1, the staple position is moved by 0.1 mm. +: Toward rear -: Toward front When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the value of service label.
Page 964 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) INF-ALG2 Adj alignment position (LTR): Fin-K1 Detail To adjust the position of the Alignment Plate when aligning LTR paper. As the value is incremented by 1, distance between the Alignment Plates is narrowed by 0.1 mm. Use Case - When the paper alignment position is displaced.
Page 965 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) SDL-STP2 Adj Sddl Sttch staple pstn: thin,Fin-AA1 Detail To adjust the staple position of Saddle Stitcher when using thin paper (less than 64 g/m2). As the value is changed by 1, the staple position is moved by 0.1 mm. +: Moves in the left direction of the spread -: Moves in the right direction of the spread Use Case...
Page 966 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) SFT-SPD Adj of delivery speed: Fin-AA1/Sort-A1 Detail Fin-AA1 To adjust the delivery speed to the stack tray at collate mode. As the value is changed by 1, the delivery speed changes by 10 mm/sec. Sort-A1 To adjust the delivery speed to the stack tray.
Page 967 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > ADJUST (Adjustment mode) PULL-SPD Adj pull-out spd of the ppr end:Sort-A1 Detail To adjust the speed to pull out the trailing edge of paper from the host machine to the built-in shift sorter.
Page 968 8. Service Mode FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) FN-SENS1 Adj Punch Horz Rgst Sensor:Fin-AA1 Detail To automatically adjust the output of the Horizontal Registration Sensor 1 to 5 of the Puncher Unit in sequence.
Page 969 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) FIN-CON Controller PCB RAM clear: All Finisher Detail Fin-K1/Fin-AA1: To execute the RAM clear of the Finisher Controller PCB to delete all the adjustment contents (excluding counter information).
Page 970 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) MTR-CHK Specification of oprtn motor: All Fin Detail To specify the motor to operate. Use Case - When checking whether there is any failure in the motor - When checking the operation of the replaced motor Adj/Set/Operate Method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Page 971 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) MTR-ON Operation check of motor: All Fin Detail To start operation check of the motor specified by MTR-CHK. After the motor operates for the specified period of time (10 to 30 seconds), it automatically stops. Use Case - When checking whether there is any failure in the motor - When checking the operation of the replaced motor...
Page 972 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > FUNCTION (Operation / inspection mode) CL-ON Operation check of Clutch:Fin-AA1 Detail To start operation check of the clutch specified by CL-CHK. ON/OFF of the clutch is repeated at intervals of 500 msec for 10 seconds, and then the operation stops automatically.
Page 973 8. Service Mode OPTION (Specification setting mode) SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) MD-SPRTN Restricted operation at Finisher error Detail To set whether to stop the machine when an error occurs at Finisher. The result set in [Limited Functions Mode] in [Settings/Registration] is displayed. Set 0 when canceling restriction on operations.
Page 974 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) FIN-SP1 Finisher special setting 1: All Fin Detail To execute the Finisher special settings 1. Adj/Set/Operate Method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key. 2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Page 975 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) FR-ST-PO Set staple free staple position: Fin-K1 Detail To set the staple position of staple free stapling. When 1 is set, staple position becomes the center so paper is more likely to be come off. The staple position moves toward delivery direction by 4.0 mm and moves inward by 2.0 mm in the alignment direction.
Page 976 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) PUN-Y-SW Set of punch horz reg oprtn:Fin-AA1 Detail To set whether or not to perform the horizontal registration operation of puncher unit for matching with the center of the paper. Use Case When the adjustable range of the punch hole horizontal registration adjustment (PNCH-Y) is enlarged.
Page 977 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) STP-ALG Set align plt oprtn at stpl mod:Fin-AA1 Detail To set the operation of alignment plates at staple mode and staple-free binding mode. Set to 1 when the alignment operation by the alignment plates is changed from one time to two times at the staple mode and staple-free binding mode.
Page 978 8. Service Mode SORTER (Service mode for delivery options) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) FR-ST-SW Stpl free stpl at no stpl ctrdg: Fin-K1 Detail When the staple cartridge is absent, staple-free stapling is not actually performed in the default setting while a job with staple-free stapling has executed since the finisher behaves in non-sort mode.
Page 979 8. Service Mode BOARD (Option board setting mode) OPTION (Specification setting mode) BOARD (Option board setting mode) > OPTION (Specification setting mode) MENU-1 Hide/dspl of printer set menu level 1 Detail To set whether to display or hide the level 1 of printer setting menu. Use Case Upon user's request Adj/Set/Operate Method...
Page 980: Operation Method
8. Service Mode FAX (Serivce Mode for FAX) Overview ■ Configuration of the Service Mode Service mode is divided into the following 10 items (#1 to #10). Item Name Description #1 SSSW Service software This can be used to conduct the registration/settings relating to basic functions of the fax, switch such as error management, echo prevention and prevention of communication problems.
Page 981 8. Service Mode 2. When the connected options (FEEDER, SORTER, FAX, BOARD) are displayed, select FAX and enter service mode of this board. LEVEL 1 SERVICE MODE COPIER FEEDER SORTER COPIER: Service mode of the connected equipment FEEDER: Service mode of the ADF (*) SORTER: Service mode of the Finisher (*) FAX: Service mode of the fax (*) The following explains the operation method using the #1 SSSW screen as an example.
Page 982: Menu List
8. Service Mode ■ Menu List #1 SSSW SW01 error management SW02 Not used SW03 set remedy against echo SW04 set remedy against communication error SW05 set standard function <DIS signal> SW06 to SW08 Not used SW09 set communication result display SW10 to SW11 Not used SW12...
Page 983 8. Service Mode #7 PRINT BIT SW SW01 hold the line/DUMP report output setting SW04 not used SW05 reduction/cassette selection SW06 reduction setting SW07 to SW20 not used maximum non-image range not used not used leading edge margin trailing edge margin 006 to 030 not used #8 CLEAR...
Page 984 8. Service Mode ● SSSW-SW01 Functional Construction Function Error codes for service technician Output Do not output Error dump list Output Do not output Not used Not used Display service error codes in the ##300 series Display Do not display Increase the capacity of SUBLOG for USBFAX2 Increase Do not increase...
Page 985 8. Service Mode Function Not used Not used Transmission mode: International transmission (1) Transmission mode: International transmission (3) Send mode International transmis- International transmis- sion (3) sion (2) Tonal signal before sending CED signal Send Do not send Detailed Discussions of Bit 1 Use it to enable/disable sending an echo protect tone for a high-speed transmission V.29 modem signal (transmission speed at 9600 or 7200 bps).
Page 986 8. Service Mode ● SSSW-SW04 Functional Construction Function LC monitoring Monitor Do not monitor Check the CI signal frequency Check Do not checked Final flag sequences of the procedure signal 2 pcs 1 piece Reception mode after sending CFR signal High speed High speed/low speed Time to ignore low-speed signals after sending CFR signal...
Page 987 8. Service Mode Function To send bit 33 or later of DIS signal. Prohibit Do not prohibit Record paper length to be declared by DIS signal A4/B4 size Any size Not used Not used Not used Detailed Discussions of Bit 1 Execute mm/inch conversion for the image scanned in text mode.
Page 988 8. Service Mode When 'Do not set' is selected using bit 7, the timeout length per page for all modes will depend on the setting of bit 0 and bit 1. Timeout period at the time of sending/receiving Timeout period Bit7 Bit6 Bit5...
Page 989 8. Service Mode NOTE: Turn OFF and then ON the power of the host machine after the setting. ● SSSW-SW14 Functional Construction Function Not used Not used Not used Not used inch-configuration resolution declaration Not used Not used Not used Detailed Discussions of Bit 4 At the time of G3 communication, select whether to declare inch-configuration resolution to the other party's machine.
Page 990 8. Service Mode Detailed Discussions of Bit 3 Number of command retransmission 1: 6 times 0: 3 times Detailed Discussions of Bit 4 Set whether to request retransmission of all frames after frame loss at JBIG reception 1: Yes 0: No ●...
Page 991 8. Service Mode Function Not used Not used Not used Firmware automatic update (USB Fax) Prohibit Do not prohibited Not used Not used Detailed Discussions of Bit 0 Select a phone number to be indicated on the report after transmission is completed. Caller's number: To display the caller's phone number on the report Receiver's number: To indicate the phone number (CSI signal data) sent from the other party's machine on the report Detailed Discussions of Bit 5...
Page 992 8. Service Mode Detailed Discussions of Bit 1 Select whether to execute V.8 procedure when receiving a call. "No": V.8 procedure is not executed, and the procedure starts from V.21. Detailed Discussions of Bit 2 Select whether to execute V.8 procedure when ANSam signal from the receiver side cannot be recognized at the time of making a call and V.8 procedure is declared by DIS signal from the receiver side.
Page 993 8. Service Mode *a: Enabled only for USA Details of Bit 0 To prevent incorrectly sending fax due to forgetting to use the external access number, "0", this function displays a pop-up warning window and prevents sending and returns to the status before pressing Start button by pressing [OK] after setting the fax number in [Fax] or [Scan and Send] and pressing Start button if the set telephone number does not start with "00".
Page 994 8. Service Mode CAUTION: When changing this switch, make sure to turn OFF and then ON then ON the power supply twice. This is the specification for changing the fax configuration and is the same specification as adding the Fax Board to the existing machine. Details of Bit 4 This is the switch to set to display the send job stop confirmation screen if the Stop key is pressed during sending fax.
Page 995 8. Service Mode • 1: To make monitoring tone of the phone line from the speaker from the start of communication until the completion. • 2: Not used • 3 (OFF): There will be no monitoring tone of the phone line from the speaker. 007: ATT transmission level Set the transmission level (ATT).
Page 996: Telephone Number
8. Service Mode Function Setting range Default value Comparing the number of digits between the sender's telephone number 0 to 20 digits and the receiver's telephone number Line connection identification time 0 to 9999 (x 10 ms) 5500 T.30 T1 timer (for reception) 0 to 9999 (x 10 ms) 3500 T.30 EOL timer...
Page 997 8. Service Mode 010: Line connection identification time Set the line connection identification time. Increase this parameter in the case of frequent errors caused by line connection status at the time of communication. NOTE: Error codes caused by line connection status ##005, ##018 The line connection identification time is the duration from when the dial signal is transmitted until the line is disconnected at the sending side, or from when DIS signal is transmitted until the line is disconnected at the reception side.
Page 998 8. Service Mode Setting of Printer Functions (PRINTER) ■ Setting of Bit Switch (SSSW) ● SSSW-SW01 Functional Construction Function Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Hold the line (when error code occurs) Hold Do not hold Output a print log when DUMP report is output Output Do not output...
Page 999: Numerical Parameter Composition
8. Service Mode Detailed Discussions of Bit 7 Set whether to set vertical scanning prioritized recording. Set: If B4 recording paper and A4 recording paper are set and an A4 extra-long image (*) is received, printing will be on the B4 recording paper.
Page 1000 8. Service Mode IPFAX Setting ■ IPFAX ● BASIC N Function Setting range Session control reception timeout (sec.) 0 to 9999 (0*) Reception start delay time (sec.) 0 to 9999 (0*) BYE sending delay time at transmission (x10 msec.) 0 to 9999 (0*) BYE receiving delay time at transmission (x10 msec.) 0 to 9999 (0*) ●...

This manual is also suitable for:

Imagerunner advance c3530f iii Imagerunner advance c3520f iii Imagerunner advance c3525i iii Imagerunner advance c3530i iii Imagerunner advance c3525 iii Imagerunner advance c3520i iii ... Show all

Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3500 III Series Service Manual

Safety Precautions

1 Product Overview

2 Technology

3 Periodical Service

4 Parts Replacement and Cleaning

5 Adjustment

6 Troubleshooting

7 Error/Jam/Alarm

Quick Links

Troubleshooting

Related Manuals for Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3500 III Series

Summary of Contents for Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3500 III Series